Afford Anything | Make Smart Money Choices

#706: When the numbers look straightforward—but the rules, timing, and future are uncertain—how do you decide what to do next? KJ has $90,000 in student loans, a recent inheritance, and a lot of uncertainty around changing repayment policies, and is trying to decide whether to pay down debt now or hold onto cash in case future payments become unaffordable. Anonymous (let’s call her Andrea)  is about seven years away from retirement with $1.9 million saved and is thinking about sequence of returns risk, and is wondering whether working part-time could help protect against a poorly timed market downturn or simply delay the risk. Anonymous (let’s call him Andrew Ryan)  is a retired homeowner in their early 70s who recently bought a second home to be closer to family and is planning to rent it out part of the year, and is wondering how to structure it and how taxes work for a property that’s both personal and income-producing. Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and Ryan Gosling: https://affordanything.com/episode706 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#705: Jon McNeill, former president of Tesla and COO of Lyft, starts with a simple problem: his teenage son is about to start driving, and he’s worried about texting behind the wheel. Instead of setting rules, he builds a solution. That idea becomes TruMotion, a company that uses smartphone sensors to track driving behavior. You hear how the app figures out whether someone is actually in the driver’s seat, and how that technology ends up powering programs used by major insurance companies. From there, we zoom out. McNeill walks us through the systems he uses to build and scale companies. He explains how to question assumptions, including a case where his team reduces a 12-page car loan document down to a few sentences after realizing none of it is legally required. We also talk about speed. At Tesla, he learns to make decisions quickly, even without perfect information. He describes how faster decision-making compounds advantage over time. You hear a story from his early days working with Tesla, when he visits multiple stores, signs up for test drives, and never gets a follow-up. That leads him to identify thousands of missed sales opportunities sitting in the pipeline. The fix comes from focusing on the bottleneck, not adding more leads. McNeill also shares how he approaches negotiations at scale, including working with government officials in China and learning how incentives and systems shape outcomes. Throughout the conversation, he returns to a few core ideas: simplify the problem, identify the constraint, and move quickly once you have enough information to act. McNeill’s new book is The Algorithm: The Hypergrowth Formula That Transformed Tesla, Lululemon, General Motors, and SpaceX. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising segments. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Jon McNeill, former Tesla President and former COO of Lyft (06:50) The "First Principles" Mindset (15:05) Managing Hyper-growth at Tesla Solving for "Pain Points" vs. Chasing Profit Autonomous Driving and Electric Vehicles Working with Visionary Founders Building a Culture of Innovation in any Organization Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#704: How do you make smart financial decisions when you’re balancing debt, investing, and big life changes … all at the same time? Today, Brigham and his wife, ages 25 and 23, wonder: can they buy a $500,000 home AND still support a stay-at-home parent? Next, JVR asks how to balance high-interest credit card debt, student loans, and a large cash reserve while planning for a future home purchase in the Bay Area. Then we’ll hear back from Elizabeth, from Episode 611 (from just under 1 year ago), with an update and a follow-up question on how to approach real estate investing over the next five years when she’s unsure where she’ll ultimately settle. We’ll cover all of that in today’s Q&A episode. Resources: Elizabeth's (formerly Anonymous) original call: https://affordanything.com/episode611 Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your mailman: https://affordanything.com/episode704 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#703: April’s jobs report comes in much stronger than expected, with 178,000 jobs added and unemployment ticking down to 4.3 percent. That headline deserves a closer look, especially when other labor data still points to a slower, lower-hiring environment.From there, we break down what the latest Fed decision means, why mortgage rates remain elevated, and how a sudden spike in oil and gas prices could affect inflation, consumer sentiment, and the broader economy. We also cover recent market volatility and why long-term investors may want to think differently about short-term swings. In the second half: News involving Vicki Robin that has rippled through the FIRE community, proposed changes could expand what 401(k) plans can hold, and major student loan developments — including the end of the SAVE plan and what borrowers should be watching next. Vicki Robin links: Paula’s Newsletter - https://ckarchive.com/b/0vuwh9h9e4289c7mggrmzhv8qo9rqhnh50v Vicki’s Substack - https://vickirobin.substack.com/p/abusers-and-the-women-who-love-them Afforder Community - affordanything.com/community Sources:
 https://www.advisorperspectives.com/dshort/updates/2026/03/31/jolts-report-job-openings-february-2026 https://www.challengergray.com/blog/challenger-report-march-cuts-rise-25-from-february-ai-leads-reasons https://www.dol.gov/newsroom/releases/ebsa/ebsa20260330 https://myeddebt.ed.gov Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising segments. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) A busy start to April(01:03) Stronger than expected jobs report(06:06) A softer picture for job openings(07:13) Where layoffs are showing up(10:15) Why the Fed held rates steady(12:05) What’s keeping mortgage rates elevated(21:05) Why gas prices rose so quickly(27:28) How to think about market volatility(30:20) A proposed change for 401k plans(32:37) News from Vicki Robin(40:55) A shift in student loan management(42:37) What the end of SAVE means(45:16) Changes for Parent PLUS borrowers Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your airline gate agent: https://affordanything.com/episode703 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#702: Olivia is saving for a specific three-year goal and wants to know whether a money market fund is the right place to store that cash, or if a traditional savings account would be safer. Robert is planning to retire early in the next few years and is trying to decide whether to prioritize building taxable investments or continuing to grow Roth accounts. And finally, we’ll hear from a listener with nearly 30 years of experience in social work who wants to open an adult day center in a rural area where services for disabled adults are extremely limited—but isn’t sure whether to structure it as a nonprofit or a for-profit business. We’ll tackle all of that on today’s episode. Enjoy! Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and Conan O'Brien: https://affordanything.com/episode702 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#701: Forget the idea that you need a magic number to retire. Jamie Hopkins is a certified financial planner, professor of taxation at the American College of Financial Services, director of the New York Life Center for Retirement Income, and Top 40 Under 40 financial services professionals from InvestmentNews. His take on retirement planning will make you rethink a few things. We start with the "no magic number" concept. Hopkins explains that fixating on a savings target - whether it's $1 million or $10 million - misses the point. What matters is what income you can generate relative to the lifestyle you want. And that lifestyle shifts. Research shows retirees often spend more than 100 percent of their pre-retirement income in the first few years, then gradually spend less as they age. From there, we get into sequence of returns risk, which Hopkins calls one of the biggest threats to any retirement plan. A market downturn in the first few years of retirement can be nearly impossible to recover from, since you're withdrawing money while your portfolio is declining. We also dig into the well-known "4 percent rule" - which Hopkins prefers to call a "4 percent finding" - and why it only holds up in certain historical contexts. The conversation also covers the topics people tend to avoid. "Silver divorce" - the spike in divorces among people over 60 - is happening at higher rates than most people realize, and it can gut a retirement plan that was built around shared costs and two incomes. We also discuss elder abuse, which Hopkins says is mostly committed by family members or trusted advisors, not strangers - and how AI-generated voice cloning is making financial scams harder to detect. Finally, we end on what Hopkins considers the most important, and most overlooked, element of a good retirement: community. He argues that retirement is actually an ideal time to intentionally rebuild your social circle, choose where you want to live, and figure out what you're retiring to - not just from. Hopkins holds a JD, MBA, LLM, CFP, RICP, CLU, and ChFC. Resources: Jamie’s Book: Your Retirement Sketchbook: 125 Retirement Planning Lessons from Financial Experts Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your frenemies: https://affordanything.com/episode701 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#700: Today we’re tackling three different financial questions from our listeners. First, we’ll hear from Melanie, who is deciding whether to pursue a promotion that would increase her salary by $30,000 but may add more stress, even though she’s already close to financial independence. Next, Ami wants to learn how options trading works and is wondering how to find legitimate training without falling into expensive or questionable courses. And later in the episode, we’ll revisit Ben who called in six years ago asking how to grow from four rental units to twenty. Today he owns sixteen units and is deciding how to scale from here. We’ll tackle all of that on today’s episode #700!!! Resources: Interview with Rose Han: affordanything.com/episode652 Jeanne_Retired on TikTok (shared by Joe): https://www.tiktok.com/@jeanne_retired/video/7615363778938408223 Ben's original question on Episode 243: affordanything.com/episode243 Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your bank teller: https://affordanything.com/episode700 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#699: You've probably heard that mindset matters. But what does that actually mean, and is there science behind it? Nir Eyal, author of Beyond Belief, joins us to break down the research. Eyal, who writes about the intersection between psychology and technology and taught at Stanford Graduate School of Business, opens with a counterintuitive claim: Motivation has nothing to do with rewards, he says. All motivation, he argues, stems from the desire to escape discomfort. That means money management, time management, and weight management are all really just pain management. That reframe sets up a bigger argument about beliefs. Our brains can't process the roughly 11 million bits of information hitting them every second, so instead of seeing reality, we predict it - based on whatever we already believe. That's why two people can face the same circumstances and have completely different outcomes. We dig into why visualization often backfires. Research by psychologist Gabrielle Oettingen found that people who pictured their ideal outcomes became less likely to do the work to achieve them. Athletes don't visualize trophies - they visualize obstacles. Eyal calls the productive version "mental contrasting": imagining what's in your way and planning how you'll handle it. We also cover the difference between limiting beliefs and liberating ones, and walk through a four-question exercise called a "turnaround" - a technique from Byron Katie's inquiry-based stress reduction practice - that helps you examine a belief, test whether it's absolutely true, and consider alternative perspectives. On the topic of quitting versus persisting, Eyal lays out three criteria: Did you hit your checkpoint? Are you still learning? Does persistence actually change anything? If all three answers are no, quitting makes sense. We close on money prioritization. When the math can settle a financial question, run the numbers. When it can't, it becomes a values question - and Eyal defines values as "attributes of the person you want to become." Resources: Download the four question turnaround exercise developed by Byron Katie, for free, at https://affordanything.com/turnitaround Book: Beyond Belief: The Science-Backed Way to Stop Limiting Yourself and Achieve Breakthrough Results, by Nir Eyal Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your florist: https://affordanything.com/episode699 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#698: We explore financial decision-making at different stages of life: A high-earning federal couple debates whether to pause retirement contributions to accelerate a $200,000 down payment.A part-time healthcare provider seeks clarity on balancing a 401k and a traditional IRA.And a longtime listener asks a more personal question: Is there anything we’re still figuring out ourselves? We examine strategy, trade-offs, tax efficiency, housing decisions, and the long-term thinking that shapes financial outcomes. (01:36) Hannah and her husband are in their mid-30s with two young children, and are hoping to upgrade to a larger “forever home” in several years while keeping their current home as a rental. They’re deciding whether to temporarily reduce retirement contributions to speed up down payment savings and how a possible cross-country relocation might affect those plans. (37:15) Amelia is a part-time healthcare provider in New York who earns hourly income and wants to contribute to both her employer’s 401(k) and a traditional IRA. She’s trying to determine how much to contribute to the 401(k) from each paycheck while still maxing out her traditional IRA—keeping the overall approach simple and tax-efficient. (56:12) Lesley praises Paula and Joe’s thoughtful responses to callers and wonders whether they ever seek advice from their audience. After recently undergoing brain surgery that prompted deeper reflection, the listener asks if there is anything in Paula and Joe’s financial, personal, or professional lives where they would value collective wisdom from their community. Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your mailman: https://affordanything.com/episode698 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#697: Most people regret the things they never tried. Venture capitalist Bill Gurley says that pattern shows up again and again in research on end-of-life regrets — including regret about the careers people never pursued.  In this episode, Gurley joins us to talk about how people actually discover work they enjoy - and why the cliché to “follow your passion” sends people in the wrong direction. We start with a question many listeners wrestle with: what if you reach your forties or fifties and still do not know what you want to do?  Gurley explains that career changes later in life remain possible. Financial flexibility helps. People who spend every dollar they earn limit their ability to shift paths. People who control their spending keep more options open. Gurley argues that “passion” often appears only after someone spends time exploring a field. A better starting point involves fascination - the subjects that pull your attention when nobody assigns the work.  Gurley suggests paying attention to what you study in your free time. If you find yourself reading about a topic instead of watching Netflix, that curiosity may signal a possible career direction. We also discuss how most successful careers involve several stops along the way.  Gurley studied hundreds of success stories and found that many people move through two or three roles before landing their long-term path. That pattern shows up across industries. Gurley began as a computer engineer working at Compaq. Even though he enjoyed the work, his curiosity shifted toward investing and business.  He eventually left engineering, went to business school and started knocking on doors in New York until he landed a job as a Wall Street analyst. That path later led him to Silicon Valley and a 25-year career in venture capital. Throughout the conversation, we talk about continuous learning, side projects that expand career options and how curiosity often shapes a career more than long-term planning. Resources Mentioned: Runnin' Down a Dream by Bill Gurley - https://amzn.to/4loywlQ The Power of Regret by Daniel Pink - https://amzn.to/4sNwZbQ Designing Your Life by Dave Evans & Bill Burnett - https://amzn.to/47yfeov One Up on Wall Street by Peter Lynch - https://amzn.to/4ruPsIX Atomic Habits by James Clear - https://amzn.to/4bj3cjR Interview with James Clear - Afford Anything Episode #638 Interview with David Epstein - Afford Anything Episode #206 Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your postal person: https://affordanything.com/episode697 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#696: (01:50) Jeremy has been a careful budgeter for years, but a surprise car repair has him tapping his emergency fund. With rates falling, he’s wondering if cash is enough or if he should try bonds or a CD ladder to keep up with inflation. (22:22) A listener in Canada has a DIY portfolio but is tempted by Dimensional Funds, which requires a pricey advisor. At the same time, she’s thinking about leaving work and returning to school, but also wants to keep financially supporting her parents. (41:27) Anonymous is navigating the tricky waters of buying a new home while still living in their current one. He is considering a bridge loan to avoid a contingent offer, but he’s worried about the strict timeline and potential financial pitfalls. Is a bridge loan a smart move, or does the risk of being stuck outweigh the convenience? Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#695: The U.S. lost 92,000 jobs in February, pushing unemployment to 4.4 percent.That result contradicts a different report released two days earlier showing 63,000 jobs added, leaving economists trying to square the circle. Many agree that we're in a "low hire, low fire" jobs environment.We walk through several major economic stories using a three-layer framework: the household economy, markets and policy, and long-term forces shaping the future.First, the household layer. Hiring has become uneven across sectors. Health care and education previously drove much of the job growth, but layoffs in those areas now appear in the data.Job openings have also fallen to 6.54 million, the lowest level since the pandemic began. Workers are switching jobs less often, and the pay bump for job-hopping has shrunk.Mortgage rates recently crossed 6 percent, influenced in part by rising Treasury yields and concerns about inflation. Gas prices climbed about 26 cents per gallon in a week, partly due to tensions affecting oil shipments through the Strait of Hormuz, which normally carries about one-fifth of global oil supply.The episode also looks at household finances. Six percent of workers in Vanguard plans took hardship withdrawals from their 401(k)s in 2025, up from five percent the year before. That increase suggests some households are leaning on retirement savings to manage financial stress.At the end of the episode, economist Dr. Ben Zweig, CEO of Revelio Labs, joins us to unpack the conflicting employment reports and explain why the labor market may look weaker than expected. He also discusses why health care hiring may be slowing and how economists interpret mixed signals across multiple labor data sources. (0:00) February jobs shock(1:02) Three-layer economy framework(2:03) BLS job losses explained(3:12) ADP vs BLS data gap(4:30) Job openings decline(5:39) Layoffs and AI cuts(7:15) Mortgage rates near 6 percent(8:26) Gas price spike(10:02) Markets react to oil shock(16:00) Record 401k withdrawals(19:30) Asset owners vs nonowners gap(21:22) Supreme Court tariff ruling(23:31) AI costs collapse, usage surge(27:03) Fed reactions to jobs report(33:33) Economist Ben Zweig interview Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your job recruiter: https://affordanything.com/episode695 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#694: There are about 90 million unique job titles in the U.S. labor market. Ninety million. If you are trying to negotiate a raise, switch companies or launch a side hustle, that number has consequences. If titles do not line up, you cannot easily compare pay, scope or seniority. You might be doing the same work as someone with a higher title and higher salary - and never see it. That problem is the focus of Part 2 of our conversation with Dr. Ben Zweig. Zweig is the CEO of Revelio Labs, a workforce data firm that analyzes millions of job postings and online profiles. He also teaches The Future of Work at NYU Stern School of Business and holds a PhD in economics from the CUNY Graduate Center. His work focuses on how jobs are structured and how they evolve. We talk about taxonomy - the systems used to categorize work. A title acts as shorthand for a bundle of tasks. Trouble starts when the shorthand breaks down. Two people with the same title may do very different work. Two people with different titles may perform nearly identical tasks. Zweig explains how large language models can group job descriptions based on actual responsibilities rather than labels. That approach could make it easier for workers to search accurately and for companies to organize teams. The conversation shifts to management. He argues that managers spend much of their time reconfiguring roles as business needs change. Technology accelerates that reconfiguration rather than replaces it. We close with stories about bank tellers and typists. Their titles remained familiar. Their tasks transformed over time. Resource: ⁠Job Architecture: Building a Language for Workforce Intelligence⁠ by Ben Zweig Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your bank teller: https://affordanything.com/episode694 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#693: AI learns your job in weeks … and you start wondering if you still have one. That question shapes our conversation with Dr. Ben Zweig, CEO of Revelio Labs, a workforce data company that uses AI to build large employment databases and study labor market shifts. He also teaches a class on The Future of Work at NYU Stern School of Business. He holds a PhD in economics from CUNY Graduate Center. Dr. Zweig starts with the legend of John Henry, the steel driver who raced a steam drill and lost his life trying to prove that a human could still beat a machine. The story mirrors the Luddites, who smashed looms when automation threatened their work. The fear of technology replacing workers is a theme throughout history. It keeps repeating. And yet, this time it feels different. You hear how today’s panic fits into a longer pattern. Sixty percent of current jobs did not exist a century ago. Even jobs that kept the same name changed completely. Dr. Zweig describes his father tabulating punch cards as a statistician, while he now builds neural networks. Same field. Different tasks. We break down what a job actually means. A job is a bundle of tasks. You execute tasks, but you also orchestrate them – deciding order, workflow and coordination. AI tends to automate the most granular tasks first. Broader, abstract orchestration proves harder to replace. Dr. Zweig argues that “augmentation” often just means partial automation that frees you to focus on what remains. The discussion turns to empathy-driven roles, such as rabbis, psychologists, and teachers. Dr. Zweig cites traits such as empathy, presence, opinion, creativity and hope as distinctly human. He notes AI still struggles with memory and long-term relational trust. You also hear what this means if you are early in your career. Hiring has slowed. Entry-level roles appear more exposed to automation. Dr. Zweig says younger workers often lack orchestration experience and face a risk-averse market. He says that to be competitive in today’s job market, you should take ownership of complex projects from start to finish. Show people – through networking and demonstrated work – that you can manage more than just tasks . Resource: Job Architecture: Building a Language for Workforce Intelligence by Ben Zweig For more information, visit the full show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode693 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#692: Anonymous (02:01) is excited about early retirement and family time but worried about his brother-in-law, who just returned from a vacation in Mexico with a bold plan: sell everything, move there, and buy an Airbnb to live in one unit and rent out the others. He wants to support him without watching him get in over his head. How can he navigate this tricky mix of family loyalty and financial risk? Maryanne (33:41) is retired and living on Social Security. Her IRA has doubled in value in the past year and a half, leaving her unsure whether to sell and live off interest or reinvest in ETFs. How do you manage sudden growth in retirement savings responsibly without taking unnecessary risks? Brandon (48:18) has rolled over two old 401(k)s into IRAs but just learned that 401(k)s are generally better protected from lawsuits than IRAs. Now he’s hesitant to roll over his latest 401(k) from his recent job. Is it ever worth keeping a 401(k) separate, or should all retirement accounts eventually be consolidated? *Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising segments. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your Ron Weasley: https://affordanything.com/episode692 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#691: Your IQ used to be your biggest career asset. Then AI scored in the 99th percentile on the LSAT, the SAT, and the MCAT — and suddenly the cognitive skills that once set you apart became something anyone can access for free. Executive coach Liz Tran joins us to talk about what actually drives career success and earning power now. Her answer: AQ, or agility quotient — your capacity to handle change, learn new skills fast, and keep moving when your industry shifts beneath you. The personal finance implications are real. The average half-life of a technical skill is five years. In tech, it's closer to two. That means the expertise you spent years building — and the salary that came with it — can become obsolete faster than a mortgage term. Tran argues the people who protect their earning power long-term aren't necessarily the most credentialed. They're the ones who can unlearn old ways and adapt quickly. We walk through her four AQ archetypes — the neurosurgeon, the astronaut, the firefighter, and the novelist — each with a different default approach to change. Knowing your type helps you understand where you might freeze up during a career pivot, a market downturn, or a high-stakes financial decision. Tran points out that analysis paralysis, something many real estate investors and career changers know well, often comes down to archetype — and there are practical fixes. We also cover her ABCD framework — anchors, bets, classroom, and discomfort — which maps out how to stay functional and decisive during volatile periods. And we get into the six thinking hats theory, specifically how pairing black-hat (downside) thinking with green-hat (future-focused) thinking can sharpen any major financial or career decision. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Intro to AQ — agility quotient defined (03:19) IQ vs. EQ vs. AQ — how the three differ (04:09) Origins of IQ — born from industrialization (04:41) Birth of EQ — rise of the knowledge worker (05:01) Why AQ matters now — the tech revolution (06:19) AI and IQ — cognitive skills are now commoditized (07:51) Technical vs. durable skills — and why both matter (10:48) Half-life of skills — technical skills expire fast (13:41) Measuring durable skills — how to spot your gaps (15:59) The four AQ archetypes — neurosurgeon, astronaut, firefighter, novelist (25:08) Improving your weak spots — run toward discomfort (30:59) The ABCD framework — four pillars of high AQ (43:56) Anchors — people, places, routines that ground you (54:25) Six thinking hats — six ways to approach any problem (01:04:28) AQ is changeable — it's never too late to grow Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your postal person: https://affordanything.com/episode691 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#690: Blanca (01:28): Blanca, an immigrant mother raising a 14-year-old, wants her son to think critically about college—not just as an experience, but as a financial decision. With the rising cost of higher education, she’s wondering how families can assess whether an undergraduate or graduate program is likely to pay off over time. Brandon (30:05): Brandon in his forties, recently left full-time work to pursue per diem work and a side project. Planning to draw down his taxable brokerage account for supplemental income over the next 20 years, he’s wondering whether to continue reinvesting dividends or take them as cash for flexibility. Anon (40:15): Anon has been following Paula’s advice on financial advisors. They’ve heard her recommend fiduciaries and caution against the assets-under-management (AUM) model. They’re eager to understand the reasoning and want guidance on finding trustworthy advisors. Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your Phlebotomists: https://affordanything.com/episode690 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#689: Most people think forgetting a name means their brain is failing.  Dr. Majid Fotuhi, a neurologist who taught at Johns Hopkins and Harvard, sees thousands of patients convinced they have Alzheimer's – only to discover they're dealing with poor sleep or stress. Dr. Fotuhi joins us to break down the difference between cognitive decline, dementia and Alzheimer's disease. He explains why chronic stress physically shrinks your hippocampus — the thumb-sized memory center in your brain — and how twelve weeks of lifestyle changes reversed cognitive decline in 84 percent of his patients. We talk about the five hidden taxes draining your brain: sedentary lifestyle, poor sleep, junk food, chronic stress and mental laziness. Scrolling social media after work counts as mental laziness, even if your day job involves intense focus. Dr. Fotuhi offers a different framework: five pillars that compound over time. Exercise ranks first because it multiplies mitochondria in your brain cells, reduces inflammation and generates new neurons in your hippocampus. Walking 10,000 steps daily cuts Alzheimer's risk by 50 percent. Sleep comes second. Your brain rinses itself during deep sleep, flushing out amyloid — the core protein in Alzheimer's disease. One night of poor sleep increases amyloid in your brain. We cover nutrition (skip the junk food debate), mindset (heart rate variability breathing reduces Alzheimer's footprints) and brain training. Dr. Fotuhi memorizes 70 names in a single lecture and explains his technique for remembering credit card numbers using mental imagery. The conversation covers London taxi drivers who grew their hippocampus by memorizing 10,000 streets, why stress management beats supplements, and how Swedish students learning Arabic increased their brain volume in three months. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising segments. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Defining cognitive decline, dementia and Alzheimer's disease (05:19) Why cognitive issues don't always mean Alzheimer's (07:24) Thinking of your brain as an asset to manage (07:51) The five hidden taxes draining your brain (10:45) How poor sleep prevents brain rinsing and causes inflammation (14:20) Oral health and brain health connection (16:40) Brain plasticity and the Broca lobe (27:02) The five pillars of brain health (35:23) Cardiovascular fitness versus strength training for brain health (38:51) Sleep as the second pillar of brain health (48:05) When exercise beats sleep (51:33) Different types of intelligence beyond IQ tests (1:03:53) Reversing brain damage from decades of bad habits (1:10:25) Nutrition and avoiding junk food (1:25:09) Mindset and stress management as pillar four (1:33:35) Breathing exercises for stress reduction (1:39:24) Brain training as the fifth pillar (1:51:52) Memory techniques for names and numbers (2:02:46) Nootropics and supplements for brain health Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your that person whose name you can't remember: https://affordanything.com/episode689 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#688: Anonymous: "Anonymous Sheryl" is 38, mortgage-free and exhausted after 15 years of teaching. She’s torn between pushing a few more years toward FIRE or switching to relief teaching now for better work-life balance. How do you trade speed to FIRE for sustainability without blowing up the plan? Anonymous : "Anonymous Ray" hired a bank portfolio manager but isn’t sure how to judge the results after just a few years. With mixed performance, dividend-heavy funds and higher fees, when is it fair to evaluate a manager — and would a simple index ETF outperform? Nathan: Nathan’s 14-year-old just earned his first W-2 income, and Nathan wants to jump-start his son’s investing journey with a Roth IRA. But with household income above the Roth limits, is there a legal way to make this work without sacrificing the child tax credit? Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your substitute school teacher: https://affordanything.com/episode688 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#687: Your tax refund might be $300 to $1,000 bigger this year, and that's just the beginning of what's changing with your money. The Tax Foundation estimates most Americans will see significantly larger refunds thanks to seven major tax cuts. The child tax credit increased by $200. The standard deduction jumped by $750 for individuals or $1,500 for couples. The state and local tax deduction cap now sits at $40,000. Seniors get an extra $6,000 deduction, and deductions for auto loan interest, tips, and overtime work all increased. Retirement accounts saw major changes too. Catch-up contributions for high earners now must go into Roth accounts, which pushed thousands of employers to add Roth options to their 401k plans between 2024 and 2026. Kevin Warsh, the new Fed chair nominee, thinks the Federal Reserve has been doing it all wrong. The former Fed governor and Wall Street banker believes the Fed focuses too much on backward-looking data and reacts too slowly. He wants strategic, forward-thinking policy instead of chasing lagging indicators. President Trump clarified he never asked Warsh to lower interest rates and wanted to "keep it pure." The labor market shows serious cracks. Job openings dropped by nearly one million year over year to 6.5 million. Unemployment claims jumped to 231,000 last week. January layoffs hit 108,435 people — up 118 percent from last year and the worst January since 2009 during the Great Recession. Big Tech continues its massive AI spending spree. Microsoft, Amazon, Google, Meta, and Oracle will collectively spend over $500 billion on AI infrastructure this year. Google's spending alone doubled from 2025, reaching up to $185 billion focused on data centers and Gemini development. Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your tax preparer: https://affordanything.com/episode687 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#686: Rachel: Rachel is new to investing and has noticed the stock market being dominated by AI companies. She wants to make sure her portfolio is balanced without overexposing herself.Should she rethink her index fund strategy to protect against a potential AI bubble? Sarah: Sarah just turned 65, owns her home outright, and has been relying on credit cards since losing her job last year. She’s weighing whether to claim Social Security now, pay off debt, remodel her home, or convert her traditional IRA to a Roth.How should she prioritize these major financial moves while balancing income, debt, and retirement accounts? Anonymous “Julie”: This listener is on COBRA after her spouse took a federal buyout and is exploring starting a small business with her two young kids to teach them entrepreneurship.Will employer-provided health insurance fade away, and how can she test business ideas before fully committing? Resources Mentioned: Books:  So Good They Can't Ignore You by Cal Newport The E-Myth by Michael Gerber Traction by Gino Wickman The Lean Startup by Eric Ries Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#685: You're not an investor. You're a saver. That's the first of 10 principles Cullen Roche shares in this conversation about building what he calls "the perfect portfolio." Roche, the founder and chief investment officer of Discipline Funds, argues that when you buy stocks on the secondary market, you're not actually funding companies or making investments in the traditional economic sense. You're just swapping your cash for someone else's stock position – reallocating your savings. This reframe matters because it changes your entire approach. Instead of trying to beat the market, you focus on the boring, prudent work of allocating your savings across different time horizons. We walk through all ten of Roche's principles. He explains why you are your portfolio's worst enemy – not just because fear makes you panic-sell during crashes, but because FOMO during bull markets leads you to chase performance at exactly the wrong time. He breaks down why diversification is the only free lunch in investing, why costs matter more than you think, and why real returns are the only ones that count after you strip out inflation, taxes, and fees. Roche introduces some concrete strategies most people have never heard of. The 351 exchange lets you swap concentrated stock positions into diversified ETFs without triggering immediate capital gains taxes. The "defined duration" approach matches specific pools of money to specific future expenses—like pairing a six-month treasury bill with next year's bathroom remodel. He also tackles the hardest allocation question: what to do with money earmarked for three to ten years from now. That awkward middle timeframe sits between "keep it in cash" and "put it in stocks," and Roche explains why traditional approaches like sixty-forty portfolios don't always work. The conversation covers everything from why long-term bonds make terrible matches for long-term goals to why thinking in time horizons beats thinking in investment styles. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths.

(00:00) Principle 1: you're a saver, not an investor (04:48) Real wealth comes from direct business ownership (06:43) Principle 2: you are your portfolio's worst enemy (09:58) FOMO during bull markets vs fear during crashes (12:43) Principle 3: beating the market is hard (15:18) The 5 percent "fun money" allocation debate (16:18) What to do when your position explodes (17:18) The 351 exchange tax strategy explained (20:28) Should you rebalance concentrated stock positions (22:18) Principle 4: diversification is the only free lunch (31:03) Gold and stock market both high simultaneously (35:43) When diversification becomes diworsification (40:03) Principle 5: the cost matters hypothesis (44:23) HSAs, 401ks and unavoidable fee structures (47:03) Why ETFs beat mutual funds on taxes (51:03) Principle 6: real, real returns matter most (1:00:58) Principle 7: risk is uncertainty of lifetime consumption (1:06:18) Longevity risk and unpredictable healthcare costs (1:13:03) Principle 8: asset allocation as temporal conundrum (1:24:43) The 3-10 year allocation problem explained (1:28:03) Principle 9: past performance doesn't predict future (1:31:18) Principle 10: set realistic expectations, stay the course Resources: Cullin's website and newsletter: https://disciplinefunds.com Grab the FREE handbook: https://affordanything.com/financialgoals Share this episode: https://affordanything.com/episode685 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#684: Most people search for the perfect portfolio — the one allocation that works in every market, at every age, for every goal. This interview starts by explaining why that portfolio does not exist. We talk with Cullen Roche, founder and chief investment officer of Discipline Funds, about why copying someone else’s portfolio can backfire, and why portfolio design works better when it starts with your own constraints instead of rules of thumb. We walk through real portfolio models. The conversation begins with the classic 60-40 portfolio. You hear where it came from, how it held up during the Great Depression, and why it became so widely adopted. We also talk about its trade-offs — why it feels boring in strong markets and comforting in crashes, and how that emotional balance plays a role in investor behavior. Next, we shift to a Buffett-style portfolio. You hear why the takeaway is less about stock picking and more about structure. The discussion covers why Buffett keeps a small allocation to cash-like assets, how that “dry powder” functions during downturns, and why psychological stability matters as much as returns. The episode then turns to cash management. We talk about high-yield savings accounts, money market funds and Treasury bills. You hear how many cash products are built on T-bills, how banks capture part of the yield, and when managing cash directly may make sense. The concept of “T-bill and chill” comes up — along with when the extra effort may or may not be worth it. Finally, the conversation zooms out to time horizons. We discuss why income from a job functions like a bond allocation, how that changes risk capacity when you are younger, and why the early years of retirement carry the most danger. The episode closes by explaining sequence-of-returns risk and why portfolios need to work not just on paper, but in moments of fear. Resource: Cullin's website and newsletter: https://disciplinefunds.com Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Intro  (02:00) No perfect portfolio (03:34) 60-40 portfolio starts (06:38) 60-40 keeps calm (08:00) Buffett portfolio basics (12:11) Stocks vs cash fear (13:34) T-Bill and Chill (18:22) TreasuryDirect is clunky (23:42) Income as bond proxy (25:33) Bond tent buffer (29:12) Sequence risk explained (31:42) Early retirement mindset (32:36) COVID panic calls (42:49) Three-fund portfolio basics (58:41) Get-rich-quick trap (1:18:21) Risk parity and All-Weather Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your preferred financial advisor: https://affordanything.com/episode684 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#683: Candy now — or a toy later? You slide play money across the table and let your kid choose. That moment kicks off this episode, where Dr. Stephen Day joins us to talk about building a “mini economy” at home.  Dr. Day is the director of the Center for Economic Education at Virginia Commonwealth University. He also holds a PhD in social studies and economics curriculum and instruction. His work looks at how kids form money habits long before they deal with real paychecks, budgets, or credit cards. We break down how a mini economy actually works. Kids have job titles tied to age-appropriate chores. They earn play money. They spend it at a small household store set up on the kitchen table. The store might sell candy, small toys, or privileges like extra screen time. Parents set the prices. Kids decide whether to spend right away or save for something bigger. You hear how this plays out inside Day’s own house. A three-year-old takes on the role of “zookeeper,” feeding the cat and picking up stuffed animals. A seven-year-old creates a weekly plan that alternates spending and saving, using patterns she learns at school. A five-year-old chooses to donate part of his earnings instead of spending anything. The system stays the same. The choices vary by kid. The conversation moves through childhood stage by stage. Early years center on routine, structure, and basic trade-offs. Elementary school becomes the key period for practice, when habits and norms take shape. Middle and high school bring longer planning timelines, more independence, and deeper conversations about work, contribution, and goals. We also dig into questions parents ask all the time. Should kids get paid for chores, or should chores come with living in the house? Day explains how families can separate family work, paid jobs, and service work so kids understand why they are doing each task. Clear categories help avoid confusion about motivation and responsibility. Busy schedules come up, too. Sports practices, travel, school events, and late workdays often knock chore systems off track. Day explains how vague expectations create conflict and why job titles and defined duties bring structure even during chaotic weeks. Throughout the episode, the focus stays on practice, not lectures. Kids do not learn money by hearing explanations. They learn by earning, choosing, saving, spending, and living with trade-offs — all inside a system small enough to fit on a kitchen table. Resource: Book: How to Teach a Kid to Save https://amzn.to/4jVOtze EconEdLink, a CEE program https://econedlink.org Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Intro (02:00) Teaching kids money (03:59) Mini economy basics (06:20) Money skills by stages (10:41) Starting at age three (12:02) Cat job example (16:08) Goods versus privileges (17:27) Bugging versus choices (18:11) Paying for chores (20:22) Family job service (24:56) Busy weeks and chores (33:21) Low-consumption kid example (39:17) Shared jobs and teamwork (43:34) Exchange rate to dollars (1:00:28) Investing, 529, compound interest Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your kid's teachers: https://affordanything.com/episode683 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#682: Grab the FREE handbook: affordanything.com/financialgoals For 76 years, the British cycling team lost — every season, without exception. Then they changed how they approached improvement, focusing on tiny gains instead of dramatic overhauls. In today's episode, we unpack how they became champions – and apply those same tactics to our financial life. This episode originally aired in January 2025. It was our most popular episode of the year on Spotify. You hear how the British cycling team used “aggregation of marginal gains” — tiny improvements like adjusting bike seats, improving sleep with custom mattresses, even repainting floors so dust was easier to spot. Those details seemed trivial on their own. Over time, they added up to Olympic gold medals and Tour de France wins. We apply the same logic to money. The episode lays out a full roadmap for the year, broken down by quarter. Early weeks focus on foundations. You start by writing a short financial motivation statement, calculating your net worth, choosing one metric to track, and creating a spending decision catchphrase that forces trade-offs into the open. Later weeks shift into action. You raise your savings rate by one percent at a time. You declutter physical items that cost money to store. You add a waiting period before purchases. You trim subscriptions, set up credit monitoring, commit to meal planning, and try a one-week spending fast to reset habits. As the year progresses, the tweaks move into optimization. You plan for irregular expenses, build buffers for price shocks, automate goals, check tire pressure to save on fuel, and calculate the real cost of transportation. You review investment fees, workplace benefits, insurance deductibles, and estate planning basics. Toward the end of the year, the focus turns to fine-tuning and reflection. You map out major expenses for the next five years, create rules for handling market volatility, repeat your most effective tweak, and close the year by reviewing progress and setting intentions for 2026. The episode frames the year as a steady climb. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. One week. One small move. No overhaul required. Just consistent attention, applied over time. (00:00) British cycling team wins after 76 years (02:07) Aggregation of marginal gains philosophy (04:02) 52 tweaks roadmap for 2026 (08:01) Week 1: Write financial motivation statement (09:32) Week 2: Calculate net worth (11:06) Week 3: Pick one metric to track (14:00) Week 4: Create spending decision catchphrase (21:34) Week 11: One-week spending fast (23:41) Week 12: Weather-strip home for efficiency (31:14) Week 14: Adjust thermostat one degree (39:30) Week 25: Learn obscure financial terminology (40:20) Week 26: Create price tracking system (43:22) Week 28: Check tire pressure (44:33) Week 31: Plan annual seasonal expenses (59:05) Week 40: Calculate transportation costs (01:01:09) Week 41: Map five-year big expenses (01:03:06) Week 42: Review investment expense ratios (01:07:10) Week 45: Run housing numbers (01:09:52) Week 49: Swap disposables for reusables (01:10:22) Week 50: Create market uncertainty plan (01:11:06) Week 51: Repeat favorite tweak (01:11:40) Week 52: Celebrate financial progress (01:12:03) Control inputs not outcomes (01:14:09) Download free guide https://affordanything.com/financialgoals Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#681: Barry Ritholtz's mom sold real estate. Those dinner table conversations about mortgages helped him spot the 2008 crash before most of Wall Street did. Now he runs Ritholtz Wealth Management and joins us to explain why we're often our own worst investment enemy. He breaks investing mistakes into three categories: bad ideas, bad numbers, and bad behavior. Here's what stood out. Research shows just 2 percent of stocks create all the market's value. The other 98 percent? Pretty much worthless. Barry says 90 percent of everything is garbage — from science fiction to investment advice. Even experts have blind spots. Michael Jordan dominated basketball but couldn't make it in minor league baseball. The lesson? Being brilliant at one thing doesn't make you brilliant at everything. Those financial memes everyone shares? They're misleading. Take Kevin's Home Alone groceries — $20 in 1990, $75 today. Sounds terrible until you realize wages went up the same amount. We actually spend less of our income on food now. Or that scary stat about the dollar losing 96 percent of its value over 100 years. Barry asks: who buries cash for a century? His math: $1,000 buried in 1925 buys almost nothing today. Same $1,000 invested in stocks? It's worth $32 million. Markets don't die of old age. Alan Greenspan warned about "irrational exuberance" in 1996. The Nasdaq kept climbing another 431 percent over four years. Recessions need triggers. They don't show up on schedule like buses. Fear wrecks more portfolios than anything else. Barry quotes neurologist William Bernstein: "Control your amygdala or die poor." Our fight-or-flight response helped us escape predators. It doesn't help us navigate market crashes. Make your investment plan before crisis hits. As Barry says, reading emergency instructions while the engine falls off at 25,000 feet is too late. He's seen every crash since 1987. Markets drop 30 to 40 percent about once a decade. Accept it. Plan for it. Barry advocates for Roth conversions and something called the "Mega Roth." Pay taxes now, withdraw tax-free later. We know today's tax rates. Future rates are anyone's guess. His bottom line: humans are terrible at predicting the future. Build portfolios that can survive anything, because anything will happen. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Intro (02:00) How fear of mistakes can make investors too conservative (06:00) Bad ideas vs good ideas in investing (09:00) Process over outcome in decision making (15:00) Thinking probabilistically about market outcomes (20:00) Why recessions and bull markets don't follow calendars (26:00) AI's real capabilities vs hype (33:00) Different market commentator archetypes (41:00) Expertise doesn't transfer between domains (50:00) Misleading financial statistics everywhere (56:00) Managing emotions when markets crash (1:00:00) Creating an investment plan before crisis (1:05:00) Tax strategies and Roth conversions Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and the person who shared that Home Alone grocery meme: https://affordanything.com/episode681 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#680: Mia: Mia and her husband are planning early retirement and want to draw down their taxable brokerage accounts for the next decade. She’s considering a securities-backed line of credit to defer taxes during market downturns. Can a securities-backed line of credit smooth taxes in early retirement, or are there hidden risks? Jean: Jean, a freelance creator, wants to take a self-made sabbatical in three years and fund it without stress. She’s unsure whether to keep her savings in a high-yield account, a brokerage account, or split between the two. How should she balance growth and safety when saving for a short-term sabbatical? Jared: Jared has been reading about pensions and 401(k)s and sees pros and cons on both sides. He wants to know whether pensions really offer an advantage or if the nostalgia is misleading. Are pensions truly better than 401(k)s, or is the preference mostly sentimental? Resources Mentioned: affordanything.com/community affordanything.com/newsletter affordanything.com/financial-goals affordanything.com/your-next-raise quince.com/paula Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your financial professional who helps you borrow against your securities: https://affordanything.com/episode680 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#679: Will you still have a job in five years? Zack Kass, former OpenAI executive and 16-year AI veteran, joins us to tackle the question that keeps knowledge workers up at night. Most people worry about the economics — who can pay the bills if AI takes their job? Kass flips the question: What happens when work no longer defines who you are? He argues we're heading for an identity crisis bigger than any economic disruption. In this conversation, Kass explains why everyone wants everyone else's job automated (faster legal services, cheaper healthcare) but nobody wants their own work to disappear. He shares why some jobs will vanish while others explode in demand, and which professions might actually benefit from AI disruption. You'll discover why the real threat isn't job loss — it's that we've become addicted to our devices and forgotten how to live without constant work. Kass reveals how financial illiteracy keeps people trapped in debt cycles that AI could help break. He explains why housing, healthcare, and education costs stay high while everything else gets cheaper, and what might finally change that dynamic. The conversation explores what happens when AI makes basic needs affordable for everyone. Kass predicts some people will pursue passion projects, others will double down on work, and many will struggle to answer a simple question: What do you actually want to do with your day? We discuss practical realities like how a 53-year-old attorney might reinvent herself, why accountants face bigger challenges than lawyers, and which human skills will become more valuable as machines get smarter. Kass shares his theory about competing on kindness rather than intelligence when AI can outthink us all. This isn't another doom-and-gloom AI prediction. Kass makes a compelling case that automation could free us to rediscover community, creativity, and purpose … if we can get past our addiction to both work and screens long enough to imagine what that life looks like. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. 
(0:00) Introduction (2:00) Zack's AI background at OpenAI (3:15) Will knowledge workers have jobs (4:52) Job automation is complex (7:53) Longshoremen strike over automation (9:06) Everyone wants others' jobs automated (10:14) Identity crisis bigger than economics (13:36) Lawyers might enjoy job loss (21:42) Societal thresholds stop automation (28:52) Bespoke services always find demand (41:34) AI won't replace human therapists (47:11) Dehumanization threatens physical connections (54:55) Financial illiteracy costs billions (1:03:21) Predatory lending traps explained (1:11:51) Housing healthcare education stay expensive (1:26:31) Screen time hides free time Resource: AffordAnything.com/financialgoals Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, the Permabulls and the Permabears: https://affordanything.com/episode679 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#678: Anonymous (01:52):  "Victoria" is 51, single, and still enjoying their W2 job while building a side business from a passion hobby. They’re thinking about heavy Roth conversions, planning for retirement, and wondering how much traditional money to leave untouched. Should Alex prioritize tax efficiency, or focus on growth and flexibility? Anonymous (34:29): "Gwyneth" and her husband moved to the U.S. to start a sanctuary for senior dogs and cats. With $100,000 in debt soon paid off, two properties in hand, and a dream to buy land for their sanctuary, they’re torn: sell, refinance, or keep their rental property? What’s the best way to fund a long-term dream while building wealth? Soyman (53:28): Soyman is 25, saving aggressively, and planning to take all of 2027 off to go backpacking. They see a rare tax opportunity to convert nearly $30,000 to a Roth at a negative tax rate—but is the strategy worth the small cash buffer and other risks? Resource Mentioned: Interview with Charity: Water founder Scott Harrison Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your veterinarian: https://affordanything.com/episode678 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#677: Happy New Year! We're kicking off 2026 with a reality check on where your money stands right now. The Good News: Gas prices dropped below $3/gallon. Inflation cooled to 2.7%. The Fed cut rates again. GDP grew 4.3% (surprisingly strong). Gold hit $4,500 an ounce. And 19 states raised minimum wages. The Not-So-Good: Health insurance jumped 10-18%. Unemployment ticked up. Mortgage rates are stuck around 6.2%. And 80% of homeowners are unlikely to sell because they locked in rates below 6%. The Big Picture: The stock market is outperforming the economy. How It Affects You: I call it "millionaire malaise." Your 401k looks great. Your home equity is through the roof (no pun intended). If you bought before 2022, your assets look good on paper. Yet you're stressed out at the grocery store. Everything costs more – insurance, groceries, everything except gas. Jobs are stagnant. People are stuck. We're experiencing the difference between wealth and income. This is 2026: Wealthy on paper. Broke at the checkout line. Whether you're new to money management or a long-timer looking for clarity, this episode cuts through the noise to tell you what actually matters for your finances this year. Download the free resource: AffordAnything.com/financialgoals Timestamps Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (01:33) Warren Buffett's retirement (04:45) Unemployment at 4.6% in November (06:11) JOLTS data and November jobs data (08:04) Gold hitting record highs above $4,500/oz in December (11:26) US inflation at 2.7% in December (20:01) Commerce Department releases GDP numbers at 4.3% (23:08) Gas prices hitting record lows (25:20) Mortgage rates holding around 6.20% (30:26) Minimum wage increases in 19 states (32:23) Health insurance premiums up 10% (employer) and 18% (individual) (35:15) $12 billion USDA aid package for farmers (37:16) Workers over age 50 listing more disruptive tech skills on resumes (39:21) Consumer Sentiment rose in December Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and cohorts: https://affordanything.com/episode677 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#676: Ally:How can I optimize my asset allocation and Roth contributions now that I’m over $1 million in assets? I’m 45, single, never married, with about $1.2 million in assets. Roughly $100,000 is in stocks, which might scare some people. Here’s my breakdown: Vanguard brokerage account: VTSAX $132,000, ISCV $5,000, VOO $5,000 Vanguard Rollover IRA: VTSAX $65,000, IVV $25,000, VOO $62,000 Vanguard Roth IRA: VTSAX $228,000, ISCV $6,000 Pre-tax 401(k): Active stock fund $218,000 (0.01% expense ratio), Equity dividend fund $55,000 (0.01% expense ratio) Russell 1000: $270,000 (0% expense ratio) HSA: $9,000 in the Russell 1000 and Russell 2000 ESPP: $90,000 Savings account: $12,000 I view my brokerage accounts as savings, where I can sell assets if I need cash, as well as sell my company shares. My questions: How far am I from the efficient frontier? How efficient is my asset allocation? I’ve mostly been a “VTSAX and chill” type. If I rebalance, what’s the best way to do it without incurring taxes? Next year, I’ll make more than $150,000, even after contributing $24,500 to my pre-tax 401(k) in 2026. Can I still do a backdoor Roth, given that I already have an IRA balance? I was told it could be complicated. Am I out of luck investing in a Roth next year? Also, should I roll over my 401(k) into my existing Rollover IRA to gain more investment options, even though the 401(k) fees are very low? I’ve reached over $1 million in assets, but I’m not confident my first million was invested efficiently. I want to correct it before reaching my next million. Emma: Can We Split a Dependent’s Tax Status Midyear to Maximize Health Insurance Subsidies? We’re a family of four with two adults and two children, ages 15 and 21. Our 21-year-old is a full-time university student and is expected to graduate in May 2026. The hope is that she’ll secure a full-time job after graduation. Our health care broker told us that we could claim her as a dependent for half of the year and then have her claim herself for the second half. According to the broker, this would allow her to stay on our health insurance and help us qualify for a larger premium subsidy. Is it actually possible to split a dependent’s tax status this way within a single year, or is this a misunderstanding? Anonymous: Is It Wise to Hold Some Investments Outside the U.S. for Geopolitical Diversification? I’ve always believed that “this time isn’t different,” but lately I’m feeling uneasy. I’m increasingly concerned about what seems like a slow erosion of institutional trust in the U.S., especially regarding agencies and structures that support our financial system. From leadership changes at key government institutions to growing political influence over economic policy, I’m starting to wonder if it’s prudent to hold a small portion of assets physically and legally outside the U.S. I’m not talking about exotic offshore schemes. I mean legitimate ways to invest in broad index funds or ETFs through a brokerage account based abroad—as a form of geopolitical diversification and personal contingency planning. I’d love to hear your perspective. Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your brokerage rep: https://affordanything.com/episode676 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#675: Welcome to Greatest Hits Week – five days, five episodes from our vault, spelling out F-I-I-R-E. Today’s letter E stands for Entrepreneurship. This episode originally aired in September 2018, at a moment when startup culture was loud, venture capital was abundant, and entrepreneurship was often framed as something that involves outside investors and rapid growth. ____ In this episode, we rewind the clock to 2018. Remember what entrepreneurship was supposed to look like back then? Build a startup. Raise capital. Scale fast. Get rich. That was the dominant story. But our guest, Rand Fishkin, told a different story – a story about founder burnout, debt, and the downside of startup culture. Rand, the founder of Moz, shares how he and his mother accumulated nearly half a million dollars in debt while running an early services business. He talks about what it felt like to face creditors, negotiate settlements, and keep going under intense financial pressure. From there, we move into one of the most misunderstood ideas in entrepreneurship: the difference between service businesses and product businesses. Rand breaks down the trade-offs. Services generate income faster. Product businesses rely on outside capital. And founders often earn far less than people expect. That leads to a deeper conversation about incentives. Once venture capital enters the picture, priorities shift. Profits matter less. Growth matters more — and it affects both the business and your personal finances. High revenue does not automatically translate into personal wealth. We also talk about the side of entrepreneurship that rarely makes the highlight reels: Loneliness. Anxiety. Depression. And the relief that comes from realizing that even the most successful founders often feel lost while they’re building. This conversation feels less like startup advice and more like a long-term framework for thinking clearly about risk, money, and meaning. If you’ve ever questioned whether entrepreneurship automatically leads to financial freedom, this episode offers a grounded and very honest answer. Timestamps Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Facing creditors and repayment negotiations (08:50) How a services business really works (11:40) From consulting to software (15:00) Services vs. product businesses (12:20) Why high revenue doesn’t mean personal wealth (25:05) Venture capital incentives (27:50) Founder salaries and financial reality (30:40) Startup mythology vs. lived experience (33:20) Loneliness and mental health (36:15) Founder strengths and weaknesses (39:50) Feedback and self-awareness (42:30) Designing a business that fits your life Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#674: Welcome to Greatest Hits Week – five days, five episodes from our vault, spelling out F-I-I-R-E. Today's letter R stands for Real Estate. This episode originally aired in May 2022, but the insights on long-distance investing remain just as relevant for anyone feeling priced out of their local market. We tackle the five biggest challenges of investing far from home – from fear of the unknown to managing contractors remotely – and reveal four compelling benefits that make it worth the effort, especially when you're competing in markets where million-dollar properties are the norm. ________ Remember when inflation was high and rates were rising? What were people saying about real estate back then? And with the benefit of hindsight, how much of what we thought at the time proved to be correct? If you feel unsettled, join the club. At this present moment – December 2025 – interest rates are falling, but not enough. Inflation is mostly under control, but not enough. The noise makes everything feel new. When you only see the present moment, everything looks obvious. When you remember the past, patterns start to show. That's why we’re rewinding the clock back to May 2022 – when interest rates were rising and inflation was near its peak. So what was on our mind three years ago? We start with the basics. Why the Federal Reserve raises rates. What higher borrowing costs do to spending. Why falling stock prices often reflect fear – not proof that housing prices must fall next. We explain the difference between recession and deflation, and why the two are often confused. We walk through what made the housing market in 2022 different from 2008. Inventory was tight. Builders had not overbuilt. Many homeowners held fixed-rate mortgages and record levels of equity. Those conditions mattered then. They still matter now. That equity becomes the next focus. We talk about cash-out refinances, HELOCs, and reverse mortgages – and what happens when homeowners borrow against rising values. You hear how higher rates can slow borrowing, why that matters for inflation, and what risks appear if some borrowers struggle to repay. From there, we outline four ways investors might encounter properties if foreclosures rise: bank-owned homes, short sales, “subject to” deals, and wraparound mortgages. The episode then shifts to long-distance real estate investing. You hear the real challenges. Fear of the unknown. Managing people you cannot see. Contractors who disappear. Agents who stop returning calls. You also hear what makes distance workable: education, relationships, local investor networks. We walk through how investors think when conditions feel unstable — and why looking backward sharpens how you see what comes next. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Trade-offs and priorities (07:41) Fed hikes rates (09:16) Inflation drivers explained (11:26) Recession vs housing (13:21) Home equity surge (15:21) Borrowing against equity (17:11) Foreclosures and options (18:26) Subject-to and wraps (21:11) Shift to distance investing (25:31) Education and networks (31:36) Choosing markets (36:11) Accountability challenges Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#673: Welcome to Greatest Hits Week – five days, five episodes from our vault, spelling out F-I-I-R-E. Today's second letter I stands for Investing. This episode originally aired in April 2022, but the framework remains one of the most practical guides we've shared for building wealth at any age. Nick Maggiulli joins us to reveal why most young investors obsess over the wrong metrics — and shares his Save-Invest Continuum that shows exactly when your savings beat your investment returns, and when that changes.  _____ When Nick Maggiulli was in his twenties, he spent countless hours obsessing over his investment portfolio – tweaking his asset allocation, running net worth projections, and building complex spreadsheets.  Meanwhile, he was blowing $100 every weekend partying in San Francisco. It took him years to realize the absurdity. His annual investment returns on his tiny $1,000 portfolio might earn him $100 – the same amount he'd spend in a single night out. Maggiulli joins us to explain why young investors focus on the wrong things and shares his framework for knowing when to prioritize saving versus investing.  He introduces the Save-Invest Continuum, which compares your expected annual savings against your expected investment returns.  When you're starting out, your ability to save dwarfs any investment gains. A $6,000 annual savings capacity beats a $100 investment return every time. We discuss the math behind saving 50 percent of future raises, not for guilt or deprivation, but to maintain lifestyle balance while building wealth.  This rule applies only to real raises above inflation. If you get a 3 percent raise during 3 percent inflation, you haven't actually gotten ahead. The conversation turns to unconventional income-producing assets. Beyond stocks and bonds, Maggiulli explores farmland investing, which offers returns uncorrelated with traditional markets.  He shares the story of someone who bought the royalty rights to Jay-Z and Alicia Keys' "Empire State of Mind" for $190,000. The song earned $32,733 in royalties the previous year — an 11 percent return if that income stays constant. We examine why 85 to 90 percent of your portfolio should generate income through dividends, rent, interest, or business profits.  Maggiulli keeps his speculative investments — cryptocurrency, art, and individual stocks — under 10 percent of his net worth. He admits his two individual stock picks are down 60 to 70 percent, proving his own point about avoiding stock picking. The episode reveals that time remains your most important asset. Warren Buffett would likely trade his entire fortune — and go into debt — to be 35 again.  This perspective shapes every financial decision, from choosing income strategies to deciding between assets that merely appreciate versus those that pay you while you sleep. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Nick's mistake of obsessing over investments while partying away returns (05:31) The Save-Invest Continuum explained (08:11) When savings matter more than investment returns (12:31) Focusing on both saving and investing in midlife (13:11) Crossover point: when investment returns exceed spending (14:11) The 2X Rule for guilt-free spending (15:31) Save 50 percent of future raises (20:41) Five ways to increase income (26:31) Selling time versus selling skills (28:11) Teaching and creating products for income (30:11) Climbing the corporate ladder (31:11) Converting human capital to financial capital (32:31) Income-producing versus speculative assets (36:11) Individual stocks and cryptocurrency allocation (43:51) Farmland investing basics (45:31) Royalty investing example (49:31) Art and non-income producing assets (51:11) Inflation and debt strategies Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#672: Welcome to Greatest Hits Week — five days, five episodes from our vault, spelling out F-I-I-R-E. Today's letter I stands for Increasing Your Income. This episode originally aired in August 2024, but the strategies are more essential than ever. Jeff Wetzler, Ed.D., reveals why the people around us withhold crucial information — and how asking better questions can transform your negotiations and net worth. __________ You've mastered the art of asking for what you want — or have you? Jeff Wetzler, Ed.D., a former education executive, joins us to reveal why most of us fail to extract crucial information from the people around us. Think about it: when was the last time someone told you what they really thought about your work? Or shared that game-changing idea they'd been sitting on? Wetzler discovered four categories of information people routinely withhold — and the cost runs deeper than you might expect. We explore why people stay silent about their struggles, unpopular opinions, observations about us, and innovative ideas. The reasons range from fear to simple exhaustion, but one stands out: they don't think we want to know. Here's a startling example from Harvard Business School research: investigators planted smudges on their faces and surveyed people. Less than three percent told them about the mark that they could wipe off in one second. But when asked later, 100 percent had noticed it. If people won't share something that simple, what else are they keeping from us? Wetzler shares his Ask Approach — five steps that unlock hidden information in any negotiation or relationship. We walk through real scenarios, from salary negotiations to buying cars, showing how curiosity beats strategy every time. One mechanic story drives this home. Facing a $2,000 air conditioning repair, Wetzler asked one question: "Do you have any other creative ideas?" The mechanic paused, then offered a $75 solution that worked perfectly. That five-second question saved $1,925. We discuss practical listening techniques, including the "doorknob moment" — why therapists know the most important information comes at minute 49 of a 50-minute session. Wetzler explains why our minds process 900 words per minute while our mouths manage only 125, creating a massive information gap. The conversation includes AI's surprising role in sharpening these skills, helping us frame conversations into content, emotion, and action. Wetzler demonstrates how technology can enhance rather than replace our uniquely human ability to connect and learn from each other. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) What's at stake in asking better questions (02:33) Four categories of information people withhold (06:33) The smudge experiment reveals our silence (09:13) Why people don't tell us what they think (12:53) The Ask Approach begins with curiosity (14:48) Making it safe for truth-telling (18:53) CEOs share how to get honest feedback (22:13) Posing quality questions vs crummy questions (30:58) Listening across three channels (34:28) The doorknob moment phenomenon (37:43) How to listen better in negotiations (42:13) Reflect and reconnect strategies (44:53) Applying the Ask Approach to car buying (51:33) Working through a complete negotiation (01:02:13) Using AI to sharpen your asking skills (01:06:13) Why this approach is learnable Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#671: Welcome to Greatest Hits Week — five days, five episodes from our vault, spelling out F-I-I-R-E. Today's letter F stands for Financial Psychology. And we're diving deep with a conversation that changed how thousands of our listeners think about money. This episode originally aired in November 2022, but the insights feel more relevant than ever. Dr. Daniel Crosby reveals why your brain is your portfolio's worst enemy — and what you can do about it. ______ Money is the number one stressor in American lives. Every single year. Without exception. That's what Dr. Daniel Crosby discovered when he looked at decades of research from the American Psychological Association. In this rerun episode from our Greatest Hits Vault, Crosby joins us to reveal why your brain sabotages your investment decisions. He's both a clinical psychologist and behavioral finance expert. His findings will change how you think about money. Your body hijacks your financial judgment in strange ways. For example: People who need to pee become more risk-averse investors. It's called inhibitory spillover. When you're controlling your bladder, you also restrict your financial decisions. Here's another one: judges give harsher sentences when they're hungry. Thousands of court decisions prove it. The best predictor of whether you get jail time? When the judge last ate. We explore four behavioral risks that destroy wealth: ego, conservatism, attention, and emotion. Crosby shares data that stock pickers rarely hear: 74 percent of individual stocks have a lifetime expected return of zero. Three out of four companies eventually go bankrupt. Yet people keep betting on single stocks, dreaming they'll find the next Apple. Value investors suffer from depression and social isolation. Why? Because contrarian investing fights our deepest evolutionary wiring. Humans survived through cooperation. It's literally our only advantage over other animals. Bears have claws. Turtles have shells. We have teamwork. Crosby shares the Ash experiment, which shows how peer pressure warps reality. When nine people give the wrong answer about line lengths, three-quarters of participants follow along. New brain scans reveal something darker: social pressure physically changes how people see the lines. Their perception actually shifts. We discuss solutions through Crosby's "three E's": education, environment, and encouragement. Reading about biases won't fix them. You need systems and people. One powerful study: people who saw their children's photo for five seconds before banking saved twice as much money. The conversation reveals that money problems don't disappear with wealth. They just change form. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Finance as America's top stressor (02:33) Psychology moving from brokenness to wellness (04:33) Money touches every part of life (07:33) Income plateaus and happiness (10:13) How hunger affects financial decisions (13:38) We're wired wrong for investing (17:28) Laziness and cognitive shortcuts (23:43) Cooperation as human survival trait (26:43) Four behavioral risks (32:13) Ego and overconfidence (37:48) Conservatism and familiarity bias (46:38) Three E's of behavior change (50:23) Attention risk and probability (54:48) Emotion derails decisions (58:28) When fear helps versus hurts Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#670: As we close out 2025, premium credit cards are more expensive and more complicated than ever. It’s fair to ask whether the points game is still worth the effort. We sit down with Chris Hutchins, host of All the Hacks, to talk about what’s changed in credit card rewards, and how to decide whether to stick with travel points, switch to cash back, or run a hybrid strategy that keeps your life simple. We dig into the “value” problem behind all those new credits and perks. Instead of letting a card dictate our spending, we walk through how to price credits based on what we would genuinely pay for them, and when it’s smarter to downgrade, negotiate a retention offer, or product change and keep your credit history intact. We also get tactical about booking travel in 2026: newer award search tools, how much flexibility matters, and a sneaky alternative most people forget, sometimes you can buy points directly and still get a strong deal without years of “earning.” If you want to earn more points (or waste less time chasing them), this conversation will help you reset your credit card strategy for 2026 with a clearer definition of what “worth it” even means. Key Takeaways “Credits” are not value unless we were already going to buy the thing, and we’d happily pay close to face value for that discount The points game is still powerful, but mostly through welcome offers, not micro-optimizing bonus categories Flexibility is the hidden lever in award travel, the best deals often show up when we loosen the date, airport, or destination constraints Cash back is having a moment, especially if we want simplicity and fewer mental tabs open. Before canceling a fee card, we can often negotiate, downgrade, or product change and keep the credit history we’ve built Sometimes the best move is to stop “maximizing,” take the trip, and protect our time for higher-impact work (or actual rest) Resources and Links Chris Hutchins, All the Hacks (https://www.chrishutchins.com) Our deep dive on credit reports and scores, Episode 221 YouTube video mentioned on why airline loyalty programs can be worth more than the airlines themselves FlyFlat.com Seats.Aero Point.me Rome Travel AwardTool.com PointsYeah.com Daydream Explorer Chapters Note: Timestamps are approximate and may vary greatly across listening platforms due to dynamically inserted ads. (01:22) The 2025 reset for premium credit cards (06:18) How the points game actually works in 2025 (10:29) Rethinking economy flights versus business class (16:37) Managing credit cards during major life transitions (23:57) Simplicity versus optimization in the points ecosystem (36:45) Luxury perks, rising fees, and who premium cards serve (43:34) Buying points directly instead of playing the game (58:44) Using AI and systems to build better money habits Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#669: Slade (01:43) - Slade, 44, and his wife plan to downshift careers in the next five to seven years while raising their 11-year-old daughter. They want to know how to reallocate their $685K brokerage account and plan withdrawals to make the transition financially smooth. David (21:50) - David has a high school senior and is deciding how to pay for college. Should he tap the $60K 529 plan now or the $200K 457(b) from his wife’s former employer to maximize tax efficiency and preserve future growth? Graham (37:52) - Graham loved the episode on holding bonds in a taxable account, but he’s curious about a tax-efficient twist. Can an asset swap strategy let you rebalance and pull cash without triggering capital gains? Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your family at the holiday part: https://affordanything.com/episode669 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#668: We’re joined in-studio by David Bach, bestselling author of The Automatic Millionaire and The Latte Factor. He’s updated his most popular book (over two million copies sold) and this is his last big launch as he heads into retirement. Together, we wrestle with a problem our listeners know well: what happens when you’ve built the habit of saving, investing, optimizing … and then feel weirdly unable to spend. We talk about mini-retirements, the psychology of “spend and enjoy,” and why waiting to touch retirement money can be its own kind of risk. Key Takeaways Think about retirement as a series of deliberate mini-retirements, not one finish line you might reach with less energy than you expected. If you’re a dedicated saver, build a plan for the “spend and enjoy” phase so you do not accidentally optimize away the years you wanted freedom for. Run the numbers on “small” spending habits, not to guilt yourself, but to see which choices actually buy future optionality. Treat withdrawals, benefits, and deadlines as part of the strategy, not a paperwork problem you’ll deal with later. If your finances feel out of reach, anchor yourself with a simple projection and one automated action, momentum beats motivation. Resources and Links David Bach’s website: http://davidbach.com/ David Bach’s books The Automatic Millionaire (updated edition) The Latte Factor Smart Women Finish Rich Chapters Note: Timestamps are approximate and may vary greatly across listening platforms due to dynamically inserted ads. (0:00) Introducing David Bach (4:50) Radical sabbaticals, Florence and rethinking retirement (9:10) Health scares, widowhood stats and enjoying life earlier (11:00) Updating The Automatic Millionaire for 24 million millionaires (15:30) Social Security strategy, RMD parties and claiming earlier (31:30) The latte factor, avocado toast and $10 dollar decisions (33:00) How $10 a day turns into $678,000 (34:20) Oprah behind the scenes, bricks of cash and an audience gasp (47:10) Tiffany Aliche, $75,000 dollars of debt and other success stories (54:25) A $53,000 income couple who retired as multimillionaires (1:25:40) Careers in advising, hiring trends and women advisors (1:28:37) Social Security taxes, new ideas and an eight year tax window (1:41:27) Remembering the “why,” values based choices and using money well Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and the "automatitions" in your life: https://affordanything.com/episode668 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#667: Home prices have outpaced wages for more than a decade, and first-time buyers are stretching further every year. Now a new idea is entering the conversation, the 50-year mortgage. It promises lower monthly payments, yet it reshapes everything from equity growth to long-term risk. In this episode we sit down with Karsten Jeske, PhD, CFA from Early Retirement Now, a former Federal Reserve economist known for forensic financial modeling. Together we walk through when a 50-year mortgage might make sense, when it clearly does not, and why the math is rarely as simple as “higher payment versus lower payment.” We also dig into how ultra-long mortgages could push home prices even higher, and what this means for today’s buyers and tomorrow’s retirees. If you’ve wondered whether extended loan terms offer real affordability or just disguise the cost, this conversation gives you a clearer lens. Key Takeaways Why stretching to a 50-year mortgage can look affordable on paper yet leave you with far slower equity growth in the years that matter most. The few cases where a longer mortgage term can support a deliberate strategy, such as freeing cash flow to invest, and why this only works for certain borrowers. How inflation, appreciation, and opportunity cost change the “true” math behind 30-year versus 50-year loans. Why ultra-long mortgages may raise home prices more than they help buyers and what this means for generational wealth. How late-life mortgage decisions, downsizing, and step-up in basis reshape your legacy far more than the length of the loan itself. Resources and Links Early Retirement Now blog, Karsten’s research and mortgage modeling. Chapters Note: Timestamps are approximate and may vary greatly across listening platforms due to dynamically inserted ads. (00:00) 50-year mortgage debate begins (02:52) Karsten says it expands options for sophisticated investors (05:42) Paula focuses on owner-occupants who can't afford houses (11:03) Equity difference: $80K vs $20K after 10 years (18:26) Lower payments could fund other investments (25:17) Lenders package mortgages for institutional investors (29:18) US doesn't issue 100-year bonds despite stability (34:00) Small term premiums create huge returns (43:31) Paying more interest isn't automatically bad (48:08) First-time buyers now average age 40 (56:08) Geographic arbitrage enables mortgage payoff (01:00:20) 50-year mortgages could inflate home prices (01:04:51) Supply constraints drive housing affordability crisis (01:07:29) Fed might pause rate cuts in December Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#666: In this First Friday economic update, we explore the paradox defining our current economy: record-breaking retail numbers alongside plummeting consumer confidence. In this First Friday economic update, we explore the paradox defining our current economy: we're spending more than ever, while feeling worse about money than we have in years. The Bureau of Labor Statistics hasn't released jobs data for two consecutive months. The Federal Reserve must make a critical interest rate decision flying blind. Meanwhile, private sector data reveals troubling trends. Small businesses are hemorrhaging jobs while discount chains like Dollar General see their stock prices soar 44%. Americans are spending differently this holiday season. They're shopping earlier, using AI to find deals, and turning to buy-now-pay-later options. Households are spending less than last year, yet total spending increases because more people are participating. This K-shaped recovery benefits luxury retailers and bargain stores while crushing the middle market. We also cover essential year-end financial moves. From maximizing retirement contributions to tax-loss harvesting strategies, we help you navigate your personal finances amid economic uncertainty. The disconnect between what the numbers say – and how people feel – reveals deeper truths about an economy that's technically growing while leaving many behind. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Spotify Wrapped and podcast listener data (2:05) Jobs report missing, BLS delays (5:01) ADP shows 32,000 job losses (8:00) Youth unemployment over 10% (10:32) Fed meeting without data (12:24) Mortgage rates might drop below 6% (20:06) Holiday spending hits $1 trillion (23:43) Consumers spend less individually (26:36) Discount stores outperform market (28:29) Shopping starts in October now (30:22) AI helps holiday shopping (36:09) Giving Tuesday up 11% (38:28) Year-end money moves (45:00) Charity and gift tax limits Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your family: https://affordanything.com/episode666 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#665: If you’ve ever stared at an insurance quote and wondered, “Is this really worth it?”, you’re not alone. Liability and umbrella policies can feel like an expensive mystery, especially when your net worth is growing and your risks are shifting. In today’s episode, we dig into a listener’s dilemma about soaring liability and umbrella insurance costs, and we explore how to think clearly about protection, exposure, and the parts of your portfolio that may already be shielded. Along the way, we unpack how shifting household risks, driver ages, and asset location change the insurance strategy year by year. From there, we take questions about Roth choices, future tax brackets, and whether it’s worth giving up investment flexibility to build a stronger tax triangle. These conversations get to the heart of how we balance risk, taxes, and long-term planning in the FI journey. Listener Questions in This Episode Andy asks: How can I protect my $2 million net worth without paying nearly $950 a month for increased auto, home, and umbrella coverage, especially with a teenage driver in the mix? (01:47) Mike asks: Given our high current tax bracket and expected lower tax rate in retirement, does contributing to a Roth still make sense for us? (25:50) Cindy asks: Should I move my rollover IRA into my new 401(k) so I can start doing backdoor Roth contributions, even if the investment choices are more limited? (39:47) Key Takeaways Sometimes the question isn’t “umbrella or nothing,” it’s “what risk am I truly trying to insure, and for how long,” especially when a teenage driver temporarily changes the household risk profile.
 You already may have more asset protection than you think. Retirement accounts and primary residences often carry their own layers of protection, which influences how much liability insurance you actually need.
 The Roth decision hinges less on math in isolation and more on your likely future earnings, work style, and appetite for locking in today’s tax rates.
 Building a balanced tax triangle gives you flexibility later, especially when future tax rates are unknowable and retirement timing is uncertain.
 Backdoor Roths can be powerful, but only when the tradeoff between investment choice and long-term tax flexibility makes sense for your goals and timeline.
 Related Episode: Episode 649: Umbrella insurance deep dive Chapters Note: Timestamps are approximate and may vary greatly across listening platforms due to dynamically inserted ads. (00:00) Offense versus defense and setting up today’s questions
 (01:47) Andy asks about protecting a $2 million net worth
 (12:00) What’s already protected and how coverage layers work
 (17:00) Managing short-term risk when a teenager starts driving
 (29:50) Mike asks whether high earners should prioritize Roth contributions
 (35:07) How career trajectory and future tax rates shape Roth logic 
(45:54) Building a balanced tax triangle
 (47:47) Cindy asks about using a backdoor Roth to shift her tax triangle 
(52:10) Tradeoffs of moving an IRA into a 401k
 (54:06) How long Roth dollars need to grow to matter Have a question for Paula and Joe? Call it in at https://affordanything.com/voicemail Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your tax advisor: https://affordanything.com/episode665 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#664: Have any of these thoughts ever crossed your mind? If I had more willpower, I’d achieve my financial goals. I’m doomed to fail with money. Budgets suck. They only show me what I did wrong and make me feel horrible. If so, you’re not alone. It’s not that you lack willpower. It’s not that you’re doomed to fail with money. It’s not that you’re a horrible person for blowing your budget. It’s that you’re human. And humans make emotional decisions all the time. Decisions that often defy logic. But making emotional decisions doesn’t have to be a financial death sentence. Money management is a skill, which means we can improve. When we understand the “why” behind our decisions, coupled with the marketing tactics that retailers use, we can guard ourselves against cognitive biases and sales strategies. That’s what today’s guest is here to discuss. Jeff Kreisler, co-author of Dollars and Sense and Editor-in-Chief of PeopleScience.com, joins us to talk about common money mistakes people make and how to avoid them. Jeff attended Princeton University and practiced as a lawyer before he became an author and a speaker. He co-authored Dollars and Sense with Dr. Dan Ariely, a bestselling book that explores behavioral economics and asks why we make faulty financial decisions. In this interview, Jeff names five common money mistakes and offers four solutions. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode664 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#663: We’re living through the first era in which an investor can ask a machine to read a decade of SEC filings in seconds. That sounds powerful, but also a little terrifying. Can we trust it? And how do we use it without falling for hallucinations or built-in optimism? In this episode, we dig into the practical, real-world ways AI can strengthen our investing process while avoiding its biggest pitfalls. If you’ve ever wondered how to blend old-school fundamentals with new-school tools, this conversation will open up an entirely new mental model. Our guest is Brian Feroldi, an investor who has spent more than twenty years doing classic, deep-dive fundamental research. He reads SEC filings for fun, and he’s embraced AI not as a stock picker, but as a force multiplier that can turn days of research into minutes. We talk about the specific guardrails that make AI useful for fundamental investors, including restricting sources to trusted filings, designing step-by-step instructions, and assigning the AI a role so it knows how to “think.” We also explore how to stress-test optimism bias, how to analyze companies like a forensic accountant or a short seller, and how to build prompts that match your own investing personality. Whether you’re an index-fund loyalist with a little “fun money” or a hands-on analyst, this conversation will expand the way you evaluate businesses and make decisions. Key Takeaways How a single prompt can transform AI from a loose generalist into a sharp, reliable research assistant.
 The surprising way optimism bias shows up in AI tools, and how to flip it to your advantage.
 Why limiting your data sources can make your analysis dramatically stronger.
 The role-play trick that helps you see a company the way a short seller, value investor, or even Warren Buffett might.
 A simple reframing that turns AI from a stock picker into something far more powerful for decision-making.
 The moment in the demo that revealed a blind spot even seasoned investors often miss. Resources and Links Get Brian’s free business-analysis prompt at longtermmindset.co/ai Check out Brian’s YouTube channel: Long-Term Mindset @BrianFeroldiYT Chapters Note: Timestamps are approximate and may vary greatly across listening platforms due to dynamically inserted ads. (03:02) Pros and cons of using AI for stock research
 (4:55) Why Brian invests heavily in individual stocks 
(12:52) Guardrails for reducing AI hallucinations
 (17:22) How to write step-by-step prompts 
(24:02) Using roles to shape AI’s output
 (35:57) Running Brian’s prompt on Kava
 (46:22) Understanding pricing power and recession behavior
 (01:00:02) Evaluating management teams
 (01:06:02) Using AI to reflect your investing personality Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your family around the Thanksgiving table: https://affordanything.com/episode663 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#662: Most teams hire for skills. The best teams hire for wiring. What if the reason someone accelerates your organization, or quietly derails it, has more to do with their response time, processing style, or sense of mission than their résumé? This episode dives into the hidden patterns that shape how people work, make decisions, and handle pressure; the clues we often overlook, and the tiny tells that reveal who will thrive. We’re joined by William Vanderbloemen, whose firm has completed nearly 4,000 executive searches. After reviewing years of candidate data, he discovered why some people create momentum everywhere they go and others struggle, even when they look perfect on paper. We explore what “fast thinkers” and “slow thinkers” bring to a team, how to spot agility before you hire someone, and why some workers need a mission while others need a measurable win. Along the way, we reflect on our own tendencies and how understanding them can change the way we build teams, manage energy, and make long-term decisions. Key Takeaways Response speed can signal mental wiring, not politeness, which makes it a powerful hiring clue. The real interview starts long before the formal meeting, which means every informal interaction counts. Agility shows up when plans change, so micro-tests can reveal how someone handles shifting conditions. Many high performers are driven either by purpose or measurable progress, and knowing which matters. Understanding our own lane helps us hire better, delegate better, and build systems that reduce friction. Resources and Links Simon Sinek, Start With Why https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=u4ZoJKF_VuA Vanderbloemen Group https://vanderbloemengroup.com/ Be the Unicorn by William Vanderbloemen https://www.amazon.com/Be-Unicorn-Data-Driven-Separate-Leaders/dp/1400247101 Chapters Note: Timestamps are approximate and may vary greatly across listening platforms due to dynamically inserted ads. (00:00) What thousands of executive searches revealed (10:35) The nine markers of high performers (22:01) Fast thinkers, slow thinkers, and finding your lane (25:35) Why response time predicts performance (25:48) Testing agility in real-world scenarios (47:16) Why purpose matters more to younger workers (55:13) Why curiosity is a career superpower Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your veterinarian: https://affordanything.com/episode662 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#661: When your income drops, debt spikes, and a rental property starts bleeding cash, it can feel like your entire financial foundation is cracking beneath you. Veronica, our first caller, is navigating all of it at once, from a near-foreclosure to a luxury car payment that’s strangling her budget. Her question is simple but enormous, how do you rebuild when you’re overwhelmed and out of margin? Once we work through her path forward, we shift to a listener on the opposite end of the spectrum. Daniel has maxed his Roth IRA, HSA, 401(k), and 457, and now sits on growing surplus cash. We talk about where extra money belongs when you’re aiming for early retirement and wondering whether to invest, save, or crush a low-interest mortgage. And to close, we take on a question dominating every financial feed right now, what if AI stocks really are in a bubble? We break down what it means to short the market, whether put options are actually a “safe” bet, and how to position a portfolio if you’re worried about tech valuations. Listener Questions in This Episode Veronica asks (02:06): How do I dig out of debt, repair my credit, and stabilize my rental after nearly going into foreclosure. Daniel asks (28:17): What should I do with my surplus side hustle cash when I already max tax-advantaged accounts and have a 3.5 percent rental mortgage. Scarlet asks (49:20): If AI stocks are in a bubble like the dot-com era, is there any relatively safe way to profit from a crash, such as put options. Key Takeaways Why tackling the right problem first can change the entire trajectory of a debt recovery plan. How downsizing one major expense can unlock breathing room you didn’t realize you had. The surprising factor that often matters more than interest rates when choosing between investing and debt payoff. Why flexible money becomes essential when planning for early retirement. What most people misunderstand about betting against a bubble, especially in fast-moving tech sectors. The simple portfolio shift that can help calm bubble anxiety without trying to time the market. Resources and Links GreenPath Financial Wellness – nonprofit credit counseling and debt management support for people overwhelmed by payments and afraid of bad actors in the debt relief world. Our course: Your Next Raise – a deep dive on how to negotiate a higher salary at work, with a special comp offered in this episode. Paul Merriman Four-Fund Portfolio – the simple, diversified investing framework Daniel uses inside his retirement accounts. The Big Short movie Michael Lewis and the film adaptation. 1929 book by Andrew Ross Sorkin – a historical look at bubbles and crashes. Chapters Note: Timestamps are approximate and may vary greatly across listening platforms due to dynamically inserted ads. (0:00) Veronica’s debt crisis and rental challenges (16:46) Cutting car costs and rebuilding cash flow (22:28) Debt relief programs and avoiding bad actors (28:17) Daniel’s surplus cash and retirement strategy (37:52) Brokerage vs mortgage payoff discussion (49:20) Can you profit from an AI bubble burst (1:00:40) Why shorting and puts rarely pay off (1:08:18) Safer ways to position your portfolio Got a question: Call it in: https://affordanything.com/voicemail Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your veterinarian: https://affordanything.com/episode661 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#660: Caring for an aging parent can morph into a second full-time job, and even the most financially savvy adults get blindsided. Bank accounts freeze, home sales stall, and family savings disappear faster than anyone expects. In this episode, we dig into what really happens when you take over a parent’s financial life, from the first power of attorney to the final tax return. We explore the emotional and logistical realities of dementia care, Medicaid, trusts, probate, and why a single smartphone setting can determine whether you can access the information you need. Veteran financial journalist and certified financial planner Beth Pinsker joins us to share the hard lessons she learned while managing her parents’ money, housing, and estate. She opens up about the “you don’t know what you don’t know” moments that hit even experts. We look at why almost every caregiver reaches a breaking point, the two documents that can save a year of stress and tens of thousands of dollars, how a forgotten zero-balance home equity line nearly torpedoed a real estate deal, and why phone access now belongs at the center of estate planning. We also confront the brutal math of long-term dementia care, the real differences between Medicare and Medicaid, how to evaluate facilities beyond brochures, and what happens when a parent dies without updated paperwork. Through it all, we focus on how clear conversations about wishes and values can reduce guilt and burnout for the people left steering the ship. Key Takeaways Financial caregiving comes for almost everyone eventually, and even experts hit roadblocks, so the goal is not perfection but reducing avoidable chaos. Power of attorney and healthcare proxy documents are foundational, often more urgent than a will, and they need to be current, state-appropriate, and shared with the people who may need to use them. A locked smartphone without a legacy contact can become a financial brick, cutting caregivers off from essential clues about accounts, subscriptions, and bills. Long-term dementia care can run five to six figures per year, outlasting even solid nest eggs, so families need to confront the realities of Medicaid and state-specific safety nets before the money runs out. How assets are titled, from bank accounts to real estate, determines whether heirs inherit smoothly through a trust or spend years and thousands of dollars navigating probate. The most important “plan” is knowing a loved one’s wishes for quality of life and end-of-life care, so financial and medical decisions feel like honoring them instead of guessing in the dark. Key moments (0:00) Why financial caregiving blindsides even the experts (05:18) The hidden home equity line that almost killed a real estate deal (10:54) Two documents every adult in your life should have (14:29) The critical phone setting that protects access to accounts and memories (21:23) What Prince’s estate taught us about wills and inertia (31:39) Planning for a decade of dementia care without going broke (35:16) How Medicaid really works and why “running out of money” is a process (38:46) The menu of care options from in-home help to CCRCs and nursing homes (44:31) The “smell test” for evaluating facilities in the real world (51:06) What to do in the first weeks after a parent dies (54:38) Trusts, titles, probate, and how one frozen account cost $5,000 to unlock (01:01:04) Knowing their wishes so money decisions feel like honoring, not guessing Resources and Links Beth Pinsker’s website: bethpinsker.com Beth’s retirement and financial planning columns at MarketWatch Beth’s book, My Mother's Money, on financial caregiving and planning for aging parents and loved ones Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and anyone who is thinking about caregiving: https://affordanything.com/episode660 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#659: Imagine that you’re at the absolute peak of your career. You’re the CEO of a prominent advertising company at the age of 36, but you feel like you’re driving in the wrong lane. It’s wrong.Then you make a hard career pivot and it works out beautifully.My guests today know exactly what that’s like. We’re joined by James Patterson, the author who has sold more than 425 million copies of his books. He has co-authored books with President Clinton, Dolly Parton, and now his latest co-author is Dr. Patrick Leddin, who also joins us to talk about disruption. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Defining disruption versus gradual change (5:20) Positive disruption mindset and overcoming fear (8:12) Process for uncovering personal passions (10:25) Patterson disrupts publishing with six books per year (13:45) Research reveals 16 disruptive behaviors (16:30) Academia embracing different voices and perspectives (21:00) Mountain climber story shows gradual disruption (24:14) Framework for navigating career transitions (28:19) Limiting beliefs and psychological barriers (30:55) Being open to change versus stability (35:00) Taking ownership of disruptive choices (41:00) Mission versus purpose distinction (46:37) Advice for embracing positive disruption Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and James Patterson book fans: https://affordanything.com/episode659 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#658: An unusual First Friday episode because we don't have a jobs report. However, we do know that in October, U.S. companies announced more job cuts in a single month than they have over any single month of the last 20 years. In other words, October was peak job cut month. By contrast, private payrolls, as reported by ADP, rose by 42,000 in October, so we have a little bit of conflicting data. Some pessimistic, some optimistic. We're going to take a deeper look at that in today's episode. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising segments. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Conflicting Job Market Data (03:40) Youth Unemployment and AI’s Impact (10:16) Fed Rate Cuts and Housing Market (20:23) New Job Postings Lowest in 4 Years (20:54) Consumer Sentiment (22:04) Social Security Payments Increase in 2026 (23:33) Rising Car Costs and Repossessions (24:46) Good News for Prescription Drug Prices (31:50) Government Shutdown Impacts Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#657: This week, Paula and Joe dig into a listener’s question about ETFs that track the stock trades of U.S. politicians — including the Democratic “NANC” fund and its Republican counterpart “KRUZ.” They explore whether this strategy is smart investing or just expensive entertainment. Then, they shift gears to home ownership headaches. Another listener asks how to control ballooning maintenance costs, and Paula shares her best advice for finding trustworthy contractors, budgeting for repairs, and knowing when DIY doesn’t actually save money. Finally, an anonymous caller wonders if starting a small business just for tax breaks makes sense. Paula and Joe explain the IRS rules — and why energy and purpose matter more than deductions. From “fun money” investing to financial planning that actually works, this episode is all about balancing curiosity, caution, and common sense. Key Takeaways Congressional-trade ETFs aren’t a shortcut to wealth. They’re speculative, lag behind real trades, and carry high costs Home maintenance is predictable — plan for it. Create a repair timeline and build relationships with investor-friendly contractors DIY isn’t always cheaper. Factor in time, tools, and opportunity cost Never open a business just for taxes. If it doesn’t make a profit or bring joy, it’s an energy drain, not a strategy Separate fun money from freedom money. Keep speculation playful, and build wealth with focus and purpose Chapters Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising segments. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Should You Follow Congress’s Trades? (06:00) The Lag Problem and Investor Bias (10:30) The “Fun Money” Rule (11:20) The Hidden Cost of Home Repairs (15:00) Finding Investor-Friendly Contractors (18:00) Planning Ahead for Repairs (22:00) DIY vs. Opportunity Cost (26:00) Starting a Small Business for Tax Breaks (29:00) The IRS “3-of-5 Rule” (32:00) Purpose Over Deductions (34:00) Final Thoughts https://affordanything.com/voicemail Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and all the Nancys in your life: https://affordanything.com/episode657 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#656: What would you do if someone in authority told you to do something that felt wrong? Most of us like to think we'd speak up, push back, stand our ground. But research tells a very different story. In fact, when Yale researchers conducted a famous experiment in the 1960s, they found that 65% of people would administer what they believed to be deadly electric shocks to another human being... simply because someone in a lab coat told them to. Today's guest has spent over 15 years studying why humans comply with authority - even when every fiber of our being is screaming that we shouldn't. And when it comes to our money, this tendency to comply with authority figures - from financial advisors to real estate agents to car salespeople - can cost us dearly. Dr. Sunita Sah began her career as a physician in the UK's National Health Service. During one particularly exhausting period as a junior doctor, she agreed to meet with a financial advisor who had contacted her at work. That meeting sparked questions that would shape the rest of her career: Why did she feel pressured to trust this advisor, even after learning he had a conflict of interest? Today, she's a tenured professor at Cornell University, where her groundbreaking research on compliance and influence has been featured in The New York Times and Scientific American. She's advised government agencies, served on the National Commission on Forensic Science, and helps leaders understand the psychology behind why we say "yes" when we really want to say "no." Whether you're meeting with a financial advisor, negotiating the price of a home, or discussing rates with a contractor, understanding the psychology of compliance could save you thousands of dollars - and help you make better financial decisions. Today's conversation isn't just about psychology - it's about protecting your wealth by learning when and how to say "no." Resources Mentioned in the Episode: - Website: sunitasah.com - Newsletter: Defiant By Design | Dr. Sunita Sah | Substack - Connect with Dr. Sunita Sah - Follow Dr. Sah on Instagram About Dr. Sunita Sah Dr. Sunita Sah is a tenured professor at Cornell University specializing in organizational psychology. Her research focuses on how and why people comply with authority, even against their better judgment. A former physician in the UK's National Health Service, Dr. Sah brings a unique perspective to understanding human behavior and decision-making. Her work has been featured in leading publications including The New York Times and Scientific American, and she has served as a Commissioner on the National Commission on Forensic Science. Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your cohorts: https://affordanything.com/episode656 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#655: What would you do if, at the age of 23, you found yourself with $70,000 a year leftover after expenses? Would you pour everything into retirement and coast to financial independence, or stockpile a down payment before life gets pricier with kids, a mortgage, and maintenance costs? This week, we dive into that real-life dilemma and explore how to strike the perfect balance between freedom now and security later. Along the way, we question whether a 0.40% fee for automated tax-loss harvesting is really worth it, and debate if the rise of mega-corporations means small-cap value investing is dead. Listener Questions in This Episode “Julio” asks: How should we split savings between Coast FI and a future down payment, and where should that down payment sit? (01:48) Lindsay asks: Is 0.40 percent worth it for Fidelity’s tax loss harvesting and how do we unwind back to self managed index funds? (32:31) Greg asks: If a handful of giants dominate, should we ignore history and tilt to only the top companies instead of broad markets and small cap value? (50:51) Key Takeaways The right savings balance may depend less on math and more on clarity about what “home” really means to you Building a down payment might be the fastest way to reach Coast FI, but not for the reason you’d expect Parking cash safely is trickier than it sounds, especially when the market tempts you with higher returns That 0.40 percent fee could be either a silent drag or a smart trade-off, depending on one often-overlooked detail The rise of mega-caps might look unstoppable, yet history has a way of surprising even the biggest players True diversification isn’t about predicting winners, it’s about protecting future you from overconfidence today Chapters Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising segments. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Are we headed for a dystopian future (01:48) A 23-year-old with a $125k income and a big savings gap 08:52) House price, down payment size, and the numbers that drive the split (10:47) The savings snowball case, match protection, and timeline trade-offs (25:14) Where to park the down payment, why cash beats stocks for readiness (32:31) Is 0.40 percent worth it for tax-loss harvesting (36:24) Fees versus claimed tax savings, turnover, and exit options (50:51) Should dystopia change our portfolio (54:36) Small-cap value beyond tech, acquisitions, and global opportunity (1:11:02) Optimism, innovation, and why investing still assumes progress P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode655 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#654: Fights about money are common, but they're rarely about math. They're about power, shame, vulnerability, and trust. And no amount of data or fancy spreadsheets is going to fix it. What you need is a better system for fairness, more open communication, and a shared ambition. In this candid conversation with Heather and Doug Bonaparte, we explore how two partners rebuilt confidence, handled their six-figure student loans, and designed a rhythm for money talks that actually works. Together they share how early money stories, law school debt, and the Great Recession shaped their dynamic, plus the tools they used to find fairness at home and in their finances Key Takeaways Why 50/50 isn't always fair and how to do it better The small ritual that turned dreaded money talks into something they actually look forward to How borrowing a strategy from the office made household decisions way less stressful The surprising fix for resentment that had nothing to do with chores or budgeting Why tackling six-figure student loans together became a turning point in their relationship The mindset shift that helped them see debt not as a burden but as a shared opportunity Resources and Links Money Together, the book DoMoneyTogether.com, learn more about the book and project The Joint Account, weekly newsletter on joint finances at ReadTheJointAccount.com Fair Play by Eve Rodsky, a framework for dividing household responsibilities Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and anyone who is part of a couple: https://affordanything.com/episode654 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#653: What happens when we actually check our predictions? In this episode we play clips from our 2023 conversation with Scott Trench from BiggerPockets and ask the uncomfortable question: were we right? Two years ago we made some big calls about the housing market. Mortgage rates had doubled. Prices hadn’t crashed. Inventory was vanishing. Everyone had a theory about what would happen next. Now we look back with data and receipts to see which forecasts held up and which ones fell flat. Scott joined us in 2023 to talk about the lock-in effect, the shortage of sellers, and why homebuilders might be stronger than expected. At the time it sounded contrarian. Two years later the evidence is in. Homeowners with low mortgage rates are still staying put. Builders have taken market share by offering creative incentives. Multifamily supply has exploded in some cities, while small residential properties have held their value better than many expected. We revisit our old clips and grade them one by one. What did we get right about the housing market’s resilience and where did we miss? You’ll hear how rate volatility created bursts of demand, how regional migration reshaped supply, and why small investors can still find opportunities even when the headlines say otherwise. This episode isn’t about victory laps. It’s about accountability. If you’ve ever wondered whether experts truly revisit their own calls, you’ll love this one. Key Takeaways The lock-in effect remains one of the most powerful forces in today’s housing market Builders have been surprisingly resilient thanks to incentives and creative financing Multifamily oversupply is pressuring rents in some regions while small residential properties remain steady Market outcomes are more local than ever; national averages hide major differences Real estate predictions matter only if we’re willing to go back and test them Resources and Links Our course Your First Rental Property open for enrollment through October 30 at affordanything.com/enroll Chapters Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising segments. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Why we’re replaying our 2023 predictions (4:24) The strange housing market of 2023 (5:04) The lock-in effect and vanishing inventory (6:03) Builders finding ways to keep selling homes (12:12) How rate dips created bidding wars (14:03) The construction pipeline and what happened next (37:24) 2025 check-in on prices and incentives (55:06) Regional winners and losers (58:27) Small residential versus large multifamily (1:06:08) Final reflections and what we learned Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and anyone in the real estate space: https://affordanything.com/episode653 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#652: What if you did everything “right”, earned the degree, landed the six-figure job, and still felt broke? That’s exactly where Rose Han found herself. Fresh out of NYU with a finance degree and a Wall Street paycheck, she had a negative net worth, mounting stress, and a sinking feeling that traditional success wasn’t the path to freedom. In this conversation, Rose shares how she broke out of that cycle and built a seven-figure business that gives her time, independence, and peace of mind. We explore how she reframed her relationship with money, learned to scale her income, and built a life that aligns with her values. Key Takeaways When a “side hustle” becomes just a second job How your uniqueness is your greatest asset The slow season that led to a million-dollar leap Resources and Links Rose Han on YouTube Add a Zero by Rose Han Chapters Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising segments. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Rose Han’s story begins: doing everything right yet still ending up broke (5:45) The Cancun moment that sparked Rose’s financial awakening (9:12) Discovering the three types of income and why some buy freedom while others don’t (13:45) How Rose Han built her “Add a Zero” framework for lasting wealth (21:30) From employee mindset to entrepreneur mindset (25:15) The three levels of leverage and how to scale your income (28:55) Why not every side hustle creates freedom (31:45) Overcoming the fear of selling (39:16) How to build a business while working full-time (47:10) Rose’s real estate lessons and the myth of passive income (53:55) Knowing when to walk away from an investment (1:10:15) What financial freedom really means and how to find your own version Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and anyone who is interested in entrepreneurship and investing: https://affordanything.com/episode652 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#651: Many who reach CoastFI find themselves in a strange in-between: financially independent enough to stop saving, but not ready to fully retire. When you’re living off a taxable brokerage for decades, does the “never hold bonds in taxable” rule still apply? This episode explores how traditional asset location advice meets real-life spending. We unpack how to balance growth, taxes, and stability when your taxable account becomes your paycheck. Then we shift to two more listener dilemmas: helping a parent retire through shared home ownership, and using covered-call strategies to earn income from a stock-heavy portfolio. Listener Questions in This Episode Brandon (1:28): “I’m CoastFI and will withdraw from my taxable account for the next 20 years. Should I hold bonds in taxable, or keep it all in stocks?” Brandon’s retirement accounts can grow untouched, but his taxable brokerage will fund two decades of living expenses. The classic rule says avoid bonds in taxable, yet Paula explains why that advice isn’t universal. When your taxable account funds your life, it needs to act as a complete portfolio. We discuss how to balance risk, prioritize liquidity, and plan your glidepath into CoastFI life. Andrew (22:07): “My spouse and I co-own a home with my mother-in-law. How can we help her retire without creating family tension?” We explore fair, flexible ways to support an aging parent while keeping relationships healthy. Paula explains how to design a win-win deal and why seller financing can help balance cash flow and peace of mind. Chandan (49:16): “Can covered-call ETFs help me generate income from my stock portfolio and RSUs?” We explain how covered calls work, what “covered” really means, and the tradeoff between steady income and limited upside. For those with concentrated stock positions, Paula shares when covered calls make sense—and when simpler plans win. Key Takeaways The “no bonds in taxable” rule isn’t universal. When you’re drawing solely from taxable accounts for many years, that account needs to function as its own mini-portfolio, including bonds or cash for stability. Asset location follows purpose, not dogma. Tax efficiency matters, but liquidity and risk management take priority when the account funds your life. Think in terms of buckets. Your retirement accounts can stay growth-oriented while your taxable account carries the ballast for spending. Plan ahead for rebalancing. When taxable balances decline, know how and when to refill your bond/cash sleeve from other sources to keep your glidepath intact. The transition to CoastFI is a mental shift. You’re no longer optimizing for maximum returns, you’re designing for peace of mind and steady withdrawals. Chapters Note: Timestamps are approximate and may differ across listening platforms due to dynamically inserted ads. (01:28) Brandon’s CoastFI question: bonds in taxable when withdrawals start now (03:56) Why “no bonds in taxable” is a rule of thumb, not a law (12:42) How to treat taxable as a stand-alone portfolio (18:31) Balancing tax efficiency with cash-flow reality (25:26) Helping a parent retire through shared property ownership (01:05:40) Options: Buying or selling with Options (01:07:07) Covered calls explained simply, income with a ceiling Resources & Links Asset Location Cheat Sheet (free): affordanything.com/assetlocation Guide to Double-I FIRE (free): affordanything.com/fiire Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your the person you buy garbage bags from: https://affordanything.com/episode651 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#650: Sarah Williamson is the kind of person who shapes the decisions that move trillions of dollars. She earned her MBA with distinction from Harvard Business School and holds both the CFA and CAIA designations, two of the most demanding credentials in finance. In this episode, she helps us understand how investing really works, who the major players are, how capital flows through the system, and why the incentives driving investors, activists, and asset managers often collide. Sarah spent more than twenty years at Wellington Management, where she rose to Partner and Director of Alternative Investments, after working at Goldman Sachs, McKinsey & Company, and the U.S. Department of State. Today she leads FCLTGlobal, an organization dedicated to helping companies and investors focus on long-term value creation. She is also the author of The CEO’s Guide to the Investment Galaxy. She explains why index funds now dominate corporate ownership, how Reddit and retail traders changed the market’s dynamics, and what it means when activists push companies to “bring earnings forward.” She also introduces a framework for understanding the “five solar systems” of investing, a map that connects everyone from day traders to trillion-dollar sovereign wealth funds. Whether you are a passive investor or simply curious about what drives the market, this episode gives you the clarity to see how capital really moves and why it matters. Key Takeaways Reddit and the meme-stock movement permanently changed how individual investors move markets Index funds now dominate ownership, creating both stability and new corporate challenges Activists often prioritize short-term profit over long-term innovation Sovereign wealth funds act like national endowments, investing with century-long horizons Understanding who owns what (and why) makes you a more informed, confident investor Resources and Links The CEO’s Guide to the Investment Galaxy by Sarah Williamson FCLTGlobal, a nonprofit that helps companies and investors focus on long-term value creation Chapters Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising segments. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Meet Sarah Williamson: CEO, CFA, Harvard MBA, global finance leader (5:41) The five “solar systems” that organize the investing world (7:55) Reddit and the rise of the retail investor (16:25) Tesla, brand loyalty, and shareholder activism (22:57) How sovereign wealth funds invest for generations (28:57) Inside asset managers and their incentives (41:56) Activist investors and the tension between short and long term If you want to understand the real power dynamics behind modern investing, from Reddit traders to trillion-dollar endowments, don’t miss this episode. Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, and your cousin who is obsessed with latest meme stocks: https://affordanything.com/episode650 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#649: Many first-time buyers feel like they’re watching the train pull out of the station. If you’ve saved for years but can’t afford a home nearby, should you stretch to buy further (maybe hours) away or invest that cash instead? In this episode, we dig into the psychology, math, and lifestyle tradeoffs behind the “buy now or wait” dilemma. Plus, we unpack total return, explain when umbrella insurance is worth it, and share what every teen should learn about money. _______________________________________________ Listener Questions in This Episode Anonymous (aka “Lydia”) (3:26): ”I saved six figures for a down payment, but houses are still out of reach. Do I buy far away, rent forever, or invest the cash instead?” Lydia, an Australian listener, spent eight years saving for a home, only to find that every option feels like a compromise. Sky-high prices close to work, or long commutes for affordability. It’s a dilemma many face: does owning mean freedom, or does it just tie you down? We explore how to separate fear from opportunity, why “starter-home-turned-rental” plans often backfire, and how to measure the real cost of lost time when you move hours from work. Ultimately, it’s about aligning your money with your life, not the headlines. Anonymous (aka “Aristotle”) (29:38): “My ETF is up 10% and yields 3%. Is my net return 13%?” It’s a common question for anyone tracking their investments. We unpack the difference between total return and your personal rate of return, and why those two numbers rarely match. You’ll learn what actually drives performance, and how to read your brokerage dashboard like a pro. Joel (39:44): “Umbrella insurance; do we need it and how much?” If you own a home, drive a car, or rent out a property, you’re exposed to more liability than you might realize. We break down how umbrella insurance works, when it’s essential, and how much coverage makes sense. It’s one of the cheapest ways to protect your wealth. Julia (56:13): “I’m building a high-school personal finance course. Should I cover insurance or credit?” When teaching teenagers about money, where do you start? We explore why understanding decision-making (opportunity cost, compounding, and spotting bad financial advice) matters more than memorizing credit scores or insurance terms. Key Takeaways Don’t buy from FOMO; let lifestyle goals—not market panic—drive your choices. Total return includes price changes and income, but your broker’s “personal rate of return” shows the truest number. Umbrella insurance offers millions in protection for relatively little cost; bundle it with home and auto. Teach teens the “why” behind money choices before the “what.” Understanding tradeoffs beats memorizing rules. Chapters Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising segments. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (4:14) Anonymous Lydia’s question: should I buy now or invest my down payment? (8:23) The emotional trap of FOMO and rising prices (11:45) Why “live there now, rent it later” rarely works (22:14) The hidden cost of long commutes and lifestyle tradeoffs (29:38) Anonymous Aristotle’s question: how do I calculate my true investment return? (39:44) Joel’s question: Is umbrella insurance worth it and how much should I buy? (56:13) Julia’s question: what high schoolers should learn first about money Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, or with the person at your school that teaches personal finance classes: https://affordanything.com/episode649 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#648: The U.S. government is shutting down. Bitcoin just hit a record high. Inflation whispers are back. And Wall Street is buzzing with speculation. What does this all mean for your money, your portfolio, and your long-term financial freedom? On this First Friday episode, we unpack the economic headlines you can’t ignore — and help you separate signal from noise. In this episode, we cover: Government Shutdown: What happens when Washington goes dark, and how it could ripple into the markets, interest rates, and your daily life Bitcoin at Record Highs: Why crypto is rallying, what history tells us about speculative manias, and whether this time might be different Jobs Report and Inflation Watch: The latest labor market data, its implications for the Fed, and how it could shape borrowing costs Investor Behavior in Uncertainty: Why volatility can make us overreact, and how to stay grounded in your long-term strategy Key Takeaways Government shutdowns create noise, but historically their long-term market impact is minimal Bitcoin’s surge reflects both speculation and broader demand for decentralized assets — but extreme volatility remains The labor market remains resilient, keeping inflation risks on the radar and Fed policy in focus Emotional investing is costly: staying calm during uncertainty is one of the best ways to protect your wealth. This month’s headlines feel dramatic — shutdowns, soaring crypto, inflation fears. But the timeless principles of money management still apply: diversify, stay disciplined, and don’t let headlines dictate your portfolio. Key moments: (00:00) Jobs Reporting from ADP (08:28) Interest Rates and Mortgages (18:07) Social Security Age (25:36) Consumer Spending and Inflation (31:56) Bitcoin and Gold reach new highs (34:31) Quarterly Reporting for Publicly Traded Companies may go to twice-a-year Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your veterinarian: https://affordanything.com/episode648 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#647: What if you and your partner want to take a few months – or even a year – off work?  How do you handle health insurance once you leave your jobs?  And how do you make sure the time off isn’t wasted, but becomes a launchpad for what’s next? In this week’s Q&A, we dive into those questions.  We also cover three more listener questions: what to do with a leftover $125,000 in a 529 account, how one listener landed a fully remote job with a 30 percent raise, and whether you can amend your taxes after a FEMA-declared disaster. Listener Questions: Danielle (04:35): “We want a mini-retirement. What should we do about health insurance – and how can we make the most of the time off?” Danielle and her husband want a break, but don’t want to go uninsured, and they also don't want to squander their mini-retirement. We look at what happens when you leave a job, where to find coverage, and how to design a mini-retirement that sparks discovery instead of regret. Lee (32:17): “We have $125,000 left in a 529 account. No one needs it for school. What should we do?”A six-figure leftover balance sounds great, but it comes with tricky rules. Can you roll it into a Roth IRA? Use it for other programs? Withdraw without a tax hit? We explore the surprising flexibility inside a 529. Pedro (44:06): “I followed your job search advice – and just landed a new role!”Pedro once struggled with dead-end applications. Now he’s celebrating a fully remote job, a big raise, and better alignment. How did he do it? By targeting the intersection of his skills and industry, instead of casting a wide net. Melanie (53:35): “I spent $45,000 after a FEMA-declared disaster. Later, Congress passed retroactive tax relief. Can I benefit?”Disaster tax relief is confusing, especially when laws apply after the fact. Melanie asks if she can amend her return to capture new benefits. We talk timelines, amended return rules, and why professional help matters. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising segments. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. Key Highlights How to get health insurance during a mini-retirement. Why treating time off as a “science experiment” can reshape your career. Smart options for a leftover 529 account (including new Roth IRA rollovers). A real listener’s success story: from stalled applications to a remote job with a 30% raise. What to know about amended returns for FEMA-declared disasters. Resources Pedro's original question on Episode 605 Healthcare.gov — ACA marketplace for insurance enrollment The Power of Fun by Catherine Price Digital Minimalism by Cal Newport Freedom app — tool for blocking distractions Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your cousin who is obsessed with latest meme stocks: https://affordanything.com/episode647 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#646: What if you didn’t have to choose between grinding full-time until retirement or quitting work altogether? By 40, Andy Hill and his wife had built a $500,000 portfolio and paid off their home. Instead of racing toward early retirement, they chose a third way: scaling back to part-time work, becoming equal partners in parenting, and reclaiming their time. In this episode, recorded live at FinCon, Andy shares his 10-step framework for building a “Coast FIRE” lifestyle — where your investments can coast toward retirement while you focus on living today. __________________________ The Middle Path Beyond FIRE Most of us think of retirement as a cliff: one day you’re working, the next day you’re not. Andy challenges that binary. He and his wife structured their careers to work 20–25 hours per week each, creating a rhythm that gave them more time with their children, each other, and their health. He breaks down the mindset shifts and tactical steps — from eliminating debt and protecting your family with insurance to stockpiling FU money and designing a three-day workweek. Along the way, he explains how Coast FIRE frees you from mandatory retirement contributions and opens doors to a flexible, meaningful life. __________________________ Key Takeaways: Balance beats extremes. Neither full-time grind nor full-time stay-at-home felt right; designing a flexible, part-time work life created the equilibrium their family needed. Cash buffers change behavior. A 3–6 month emergency fund reduces stress and scarcity thinking, making it easier to parent calmly and make better money decisions. Choose time over trappings. Fancy upgrades aren’t worth trading away presence; prioritizing family time beats lifestyle escalation. Resources mentioned: Andy Hill's book on Amazon: Own Your Time Marriage, Kids, and Money Podcast (4:01) Why the shift (5:35) What their life looks like now (9:08) Why extremes didn’t work for Andy and Nicole (14:45) Step 1 Dream and define your ideal life (18:21) Step 2 Commit to living without high-interest debt (20:38) Step 3 Protect your family (insurance, estate plan, emergency fund) (27:04) Step 4 Invest to reach Coast FIRE (30:29) Step 5 Pay off your home (or optimize if renting (36:21) Step 6 Stockpile FU money (47:53) Step 7 Design a three-day workweek (57:02) Step 8 Plan your intentional four-day weekend (1:02:39) Step 9 Simplify to avoid lifestyle creep (1:08:56) Step 10 Teach your kids the path to time freedom Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, or with your neighbor with the tricked-out basement : https://affordanything.com/episode646 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#645: Mike (02:50): After 15 years of intentional living, Mike is 80 percent of the way to financial independence. Now he’s trying to help friends take control of their own financial future. But what happens when one spouse is eager to learn and invest, while the other isn’t interested? Michael (27:07): For two years, Michael has tracked his net worth monthly. So far, growth has been driven almost entirely by how much he saved. But when will investment returns begin to take over and shift that steady line into an exponential curve? Alvaro (34:00): After 15 years of investing in U.S. and European real estate, Alvaro has a big decision to make. Should he leverage a commercial loan to build an ADU for short-term rental income, or take on more personal debt to expand their family home? Jonathan (58:50): After hearing Paula and Joe discuss the efficient frontier — and then listening to Big ERN, Paul Merriman, and JL Collins — Jonathan can’t help but wonder: has Joe’s perspective evolved? Is the simple path still enough, or is there merit in a more complex approach? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it ⁠here⁠. Resources Mentioned: JL Collins Part 1 and Part 2 Karsten Jeske (Big Ern) Episode 643 Paul Merriman Episode 550 Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising segments. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your veterinarian: https://affordanything.com/episode645 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#644: Why do we both crave money and resent it? Why do some people sabotage their financial futures in the name of short-term comfort? And why is your brain — not the stock market — the biggest threat to your wealth? In this conversation, we explore the surprising ways that psychology and money intertwine. Our guest, Dr. Daniel Crosby, is a behavioral finance expert, psychologist, and bestselling author of The Soul of Wealth, The Behavioral Investor, and The Laws of Wealth. His research dives into how our emotions, childhood scripts, and personalities shape the financial decisions we make every day. Dr. Crosby shares why investing is an act of optimism, why income matters more than coupon clipping, and how our spending reveals truths about who we really are — even when we don’t realize it.. Key Takeaways Money is a mirror. The way you earn and spend reflects your real values, not just your stated ones. Tracking your money reveals gaps between who you say you are and how you actually live. Income drives wealth. Frugality matters, but once the basics are handled, your long-term financial future is determined more by growing your income than by cutting costs. Short-term comfort is costly. The biggest threat to your wealth isn’t the market — it’s the temptation to prioritize momentary relief (panic-selling, stress spending) over your long-term goals. Resources & Links Dr. Daniel Crosby on LinkedIn Standard Deviations Podcast Books by Dr. Crosby: The Soul of Wealth The Laws of Wealth The Behavioral Investor Personal Benchmark Closing This episode reminds us that building wealth isn’t just about math — it’s about mindset. The markets may fluctuate, but the greatest risks and rewards often lie within our own psychology. If you enjoyed this conversation, share it with a friend, subscribe to our newsletter at affordanything.com/newsletter, and connect with our community at affordanything.com/community. You can afford anything, but not everything. Choose wisely. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising segments. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (03:24) Does money really buy happiness? Rethinking the $75k income myth. (08:48) Our conflicted relationship with money: Love, resentment, and the paradox of wealth. (10:32) Childhood money scripts: How early beliefs still drive adult financial behavior. (16:10) Personality traits & money outcomes: Why agreeableness and neuroticism matter. (24:15) Investing as an act of optimism: Human progress, markets, and long-term growth. (30:39) AI, work, and the future of wealth: Why EQ may outpace IQ in tomorrow’s economy. (39:46) Habits vs. willpower: Why automation and environment beat discipline. (44:28) Frictionless spending: How Apple Pay and subscriptions fuel overspending. (47:32) Offense vs. defense in wealth: Why income matters more than extreme frugality. (1:03:16) Chronic vs. episodic mistakes: Small leaks, lost compounding, and long-term damage. (1:06:24) The pre-mortem exercise: A Stoic-inspired tool to prevent financial failure. Share this episode with a friend, colleagues, your veterinarian: https://affordanything.com/episode644 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#643: Picture this: you're at the Federal Reserve years ago. The chairman literally hangs up a conference call, waits 30 minutes, then calls back — suddenly everyone agrees on the rate decision.  That's the kind of insider story Karsten Jeske (“Big ERN”) shares when he joins us to break down what's happening with the economy right now. Karsten worked at the Federal Reserve Bank of Atlanta for eight years, then spent a decade on Wall Street at Bank of New York Mellon.  Today he runs the popular Early Retirement Now website, where he applies his economist background to help people understand money and markets. You'll hear Karsten explain why the Fed is about to start cutting interest rates. The futures markets are pricing in a 90 percent chance of a quarter-point cut, with more cuts likely through the end of the year.  But why? After all, inflation just ticked up in the latest CPI report, yet the Fed is still planning to lower rates. We dive into how this affects real people. If you're thinking about buying or selling a house, Karsten suggests acting sooner rather than later.  He explains the "buy the rumor, sell the news" principle – the bond market may have already priced in the good news about rate cuts, so waiting might not help you. The conversation covers some surprising economics too. Did you know that high interest rates can actually cause housing inflation?  When mortgage rates are expensive, fewer people build new homes, which drives up prices. It's the opposite of what most people think happens. Karsten walks through the recent jobs report revisions that caught everyone off guard. The government had to subtract nearly a million jobs from their previous estimates. He explains how this happens – it's not that officials are making up numbers, but tracking new businesses is genuinely hard to do in real time. You'll also learn about two Fed tools most people haven't heard of: the dot plot and R-star. The dot plot shows where Fed officials think interest rates should go over time. R-star represents the theoretical perfect interest rate when the economy has no problems — currently around 3 percent. The interview wraps up with Carsten's take on Fed culture. The consensus-building era under Greenspan is giving way to more dissenting votes, which actually makes the central bank more like it was decades ago under Paul Volcker. Enjoy! Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (1:04) Carsten’s career path from Fed to Wall Street (1:57) Current economic growth limbo state (4:04) GDP formula and tariff impacts (5:10) Trade efficiency and comparative advantage (6:04) Supply chain threats from protectionism (8:20) Fed meeting and rate cut expectations (9:35) Market pricing in multiple rate cuts (12:19) Real estate timing and mortgage rates (13:55) How Fed rates affect treasury yields (18:50) Buy the rumor, sell the news strategy (22:13) Fed transparency and decision telegraphing (25:56) Fed consensus culture versus dissent (30:48) CPI data shows inflation ticking up (34:32) Transitory versus persistent inflation confusion (38:56) Fed behind the curve on rate cuts (40:00) Major jobs report revisions explained (44:24) Methodological issues with new business tracking (46:00) Dot plot and R-star concepts explained (52:29) Bond allocation strategies by age (57:25) Current bond yields look attractive Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

EXCLUSIVE: Is your money safe in today’s economy? In this bonus interview, Paula Pant sits down with financial expert Rob Berger to unpack the latest on inflation, interest rates, market valuations, and the future of Social Security. Together, Paula and Rob dive into the tough questions: Is the American Dream dead for Gen Z? Will there be another market crash? How should you invest when stocks feel overpriced? Can you still retire comfortably if Social Security gets cut? Rob also shares his insights on asset allocation, diversification, and long-term investing strategies — advice that matters whether you’re in your 20s saving for a first home or in your 60s planning for retirement. Don’t miss this conversation between Paula Pant and Rob Berger — a deep dive into money, markets, and the decisions that shape your financial future. Timestamps: (04:19) CPI Numbers, Mortgage Rates, and Market Outlook (05:05) Inflation, Jobs & the Fed’s Dilemma (05:46) Stagflation Concerns (06:38) Interest Rate Predictions (07:29) Stock Market Valuations & The Magnificent Seven (09:46) Diversification & Index Fund Concerns (10:53) Rules of Thumb for Asset Allocation (12:07) Bonds: TIPS vs. Nominal Treasuries (13:04) The Future of Social Security (14:41) Retirement Planning for Ages 55–60 (16:59) Should You Invest More Aggressively Near Retirement? (18:52) Gen Z, Millennials & the American Dream (21:08) Action Plan for a 25-Year-Old Buyer (22:45) Predictions for 2026 (and Why Predictions Fail) (25:12) Closing Thoughts & Where to Find Rob Berger Resources mentioned: The Rob Berger Show on YouTube Free Asset Location Cheat-Sheet For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/robbergerhttps://affordanything.com/robberger Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#642: Curious about how individual stock picking could sharpen your investing skills—even if you’re an avid index fund investor? Paula sits down with David Gardner, co-founder of The Motley Fool and author of Rule Breaker Investing, to delve into the world of contrarian stock strategies and the mindset behind picking standout companies. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Sports team investing analogy (4:20) Individual stocks vs index funds (7:12) Values-based investing approach (13:16) Starbucks pick criteria (13:28) Six rule breaker traits (20:41) Why overvalued works (26:44) Market timing philosophy (32:20) Traditional metrics miss key factors (39:18) When to sell stocks (45:26) Winners vs losers math (48:32) Portfolio allocation rules (55:10) Sleep number concept (1:00:00) Adding to winners strategy (1:05:16) Evaluating unfamiliar companies (1:09:15) Dot-com bubble lessons (1:16:24) AI investing parallels (1:20:18) Sports betting critique Resource: David Gardner's book: Rule Breaker Investing: How to Pick the Best Stocks of the Future and Build Lasting Wealth Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#641: Cristina has a $1.2 million portfolio and hopes to make work optional within the next decade. Is she invested in the right way? Or should she change up her asset allocation? Anonymous and her husband plan to retire in 5 years. They have 10 rental properties and a $2.75 million portfolio. They dream of slow travel, generosity, and family time. How should they structure their assets to support the lifestyle they want? Paula (the caller) and her husband are planning for three kids, private school, and possibly college down the road.  Should they front-load a 529 plan with a large lump sum, or take a different approach? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. Resources mentioned in the show: Interview with Frank Vasquez Risk Parity Cheat Sheet Caller Christina's original call on https://affordanything.com/episode463 Afford Anything Episode 618 https://affordanything.com/episode618 Risk Parity Portfolio Blueprint https://affordanything.com/riskparity Joe's episode SB 1698 https://www.stackingbenjamins.com/create-your-retirement-spending-plan-1698/ Run The Line half marathon with Joe: https://runsignup.com/Race/TX/Texarkana/RuntheLineHalfMarathonTXAR SavingForCollege.com Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (01:42) Christina (16:42) Anonymous (33:40) Paula the Caller Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#640: The jobs report came out this morning and it was a painful one. The US added only 22,000 new jobs in August, according to the latest BLS report. And unemployment ticked up to 4.3%. What does this mean? Find out in today's First Friday episode! Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (01:48) ADP vs BLS Jobs Data (04:33) Mortgage Rates & Their Impact on Homebuyers and Sellers (11:30) Fed Chair Jerome Powell’s Remarks (12:54) The Fed’s Dual Mandate Explained (15:58) The Fed’s Changing Approach to Unemployment (18:13) Implications: Rate Cuts on the Table For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode640 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#639: Aisha is excited to share how some life-changing advice has played out for her career. She wonders now: what limiting beliefs has Paula and Joe had to overcome in their businesses? Lesley is attracted to community bonds as a way to build collective wealth for the underserved. But do the same risks exist as they do in the traditional bond market? An anonymous caller is intrigued by the promise of Employee Stock Ownership Plans. Is this the answer to a smooth exit from her business that also leaves a legacy for her employees? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. Resources mentioned in the show: Aisha's original call in Episode 473 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#638: Fifty dollars. That's how much this couple transferred to their "Trip to Europe" savings account each time they cooked dinner instead of going to a restaurant. By year's end, they had funded their dream vacation — not through budgeting or willpower, but by hacking their habit loop. This story illustrates how James Clear approaches habit change. Clear joins us to explain the four-stage cycle that drives every behavior: cue, craving, response, and reward. You see a restaurant (cue), predict it will be convenient and tasty (craving), eat out (response), and satisfy your hunger (reward). Repeat this loop enough times and the behavior becomes automatic. Clear translates these four stages into four laws for building good habits: make it obvious, make it attractive, make it easy, and make it satisfying. Want to break a bad habit? Flip the script — make it invisible, unattractive, difficult, and unsatisfying. We explore practical strategies like habit stacking, where you attach a new behavior to an existing routine. Clear suggests saying "After I make my morning coffee, then I will review my budget for two minutes" rather than relying on motivation alone. He explains temptation bundling — pairing something you need to do with something you want to do, like only listening to your favorite podcast while meal prepping. The conversation covers why most people focus on outcomes when they should focus on identity. Instead of saying "I want to save 10,000 dollars," Clear suggests thinking "I want to become a saver" — then asking what actions a saver would take daily. Clear addresses the challenge of delayed gratification with money habits. Saving feels unrewarding in the moment because the benefits come later. He shares techniques for creating immediate satisfaction, like the couple's Europe fund or using habit tracking to mark small wins. THIS EPISODE IS FROM OUR “GREATEST HITS” VAULT, AND ORIGINALLY AIRED IN 2018. ____
 Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) James explains four habit stages (5:22) Cue and craving examples (8:47) Four laws of behavior change (11:05) Making habits obvious through environment design (14:56) Habit stacking with existing routines (16:12) Travel and changing contexts (18:58) Temptation bundling strategies (25:21) Motivation rituals and triggers (29:52) First ad break ends (33:11) Habits of avoidance challenges (39:10) Social reinforcement and tribes (41:09) Making habits easy through friction reduction (44:03) Delayed gratification and immediate rewards (54:16) Second ad break ends (57:16) Making habits satisfying (1:03:01) Commitment devices and accountability (1:08:35) Identity-based versus outcome-based habits Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#637: Nick wants to set up an investment account for his nephew to contribute annually, creating a nest egg for college since the parents are already opening a 529. He's unsure whether a standard brokerage account, IRA or other options work best when you're not the parent. Diana asks whether she needs TIPS in her portfolio to protect against inflation. Or can she just rely on other investments that outpace inflation? She's also wondering about the tax implications of TIPS ETFs. This matters during her peak earning years. Prethive asks whether he should switch from Roth to Traditional 401(k) contributions. When he retires, he wants to move to a tax-free state. Or maybe move abroad. He wonders if moving to avoid state taxes in retirement would save more money long-term. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode637https://affordanything.com/episode637 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#636: Behavioral economist Etinosa Agbonlahor joins us to discuss "money scripts" — the unconscious beliefs we inherit or develop about finances.  Agbonlahor, CEO of Decision Alpha and former Director of Behavioral Science Research at Fidelity Investments, is the author of "How to Talk to Your Parents About Money."  She studied financial management at Cornell University and explains how these hidden biases create problems when we try to discuss finances with family members. You might assume everyone thinks saving money makes sense, while your parents operate under completely different beliefs. These conflicting scripts can derail conversations before they start.  Agbonlahor shares the story of a single mother who became so anxious about money after her divorce that she refused to buy her teenager expensive shoes. Years later, she realized she was trying to teach extreme frugality to protect her daughters from the financial insecurity she experienced. The key to productive money conversations lies in three principles: care, curiosity and cooperation. You approach with empathy rather than judgment, ask open-ended questions to understand their situation, and work together toward solutions instead of trying to be the financial savior. The conversation covers specific topics you should address with aging parents: debt, retirement planning, long-term care preferences, and estate planning. Agbonlahor emphasizes starting these discussions early, before a crisis hits.  You want to understand their vision for retirement — whether they prioritize security, adventure or leaving a legacy — and then assess the gap between their goals and current reality. When parents refuse to discuss finances, you might need to involve trusted friends, spiritual leaders or professional advisors who can have these conversations instead.  Resources Mentioned: Book: How to Talk to Your Parents About Money, by Etinosa Agbonlahor The Humble Dollar Forum Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Introduction to money scripts (00:56) What behavioral economics studies (03:03) Hidden money beliefs (04:34) Money script examples (06:16) Adult trauma responses (09:32) Personality and money (11:57) Trauma changes personality (12:55) Protecting future habits (15:17) Debt conversation approach (22:03) When to start conversations (27:53) Using "I" statements (29:51) Sample conversation scripts (33:36) Handling resistance (43:35) Parents' money frameworks (56:46) Long-term care planning (58:02) Stepparent conversations For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode636 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#635: Arielle’s head is spinning from the seemingly contradictory advice she hears about the best investments to hedge against inflation and a possible recession. What’s she missing? Dave is curious about private investments after listening to a recent First Friday episode. What are they, and should he consider them for his portfolio? Abbey is stoked about the raise she negotiated for her first job out of school. But she’s worried about liability risk related to her new position. How does she protect herself?  Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode635 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#634: Picture this: you're 26 years old, fresh out of Wharton, and you decide to start a business with two friends. You spend years building a digital marketing firm that eventually works with Dollar Shave Club and Madison Reed. You bootstrap the entire thing without taking a dime of venture capital funding. That's exactly what one Wharton graduate did — and his story represents the reality of entrepreneurship that most people never hear about. Lori Rosenkopf, a management professor at Wharton Business School and head of Venture Labs, joins us to shatter the biggest myths about starting a business. The Mark Zuckerberg college dropout story? It's not just rare — it's misleading. Research shows that the most successful entrepreneurs, those in the top 0.1 percent of venture-backed firms, average late 30s to early 40s when they start their companies. Many continue launching businesses into their 50s and 60s.  Your age and corporate experience isn't holding you back from entrepreneurship — it's actually giving you an advantage. Rosenkopf breaks down seven different types of entrepreneurs, from disruptors who overturn entire industries to bootstrappers who build profitable businesses using their own resources. You'll hear about a founder who disrupted the hair color industry in her 50s with Madison Reed, and a banker who built an entire financial services division inside Square. We cover the rise of direct-to-consumer brands in 2013, why 80 percent of entrepreneurs are bootstrappers, and how artificial intelligence is creating new opportunities for people to start businesses without massive upfront investments. Rosenkopf explains her "six Rs" of entrepreneurial thinking: reason, recombination, relationships, resources, resilience, and results. She argues that most people already think entrepreneurially without realizing it — even parents who optimize their family routines are solving problems through innovation. We explore the world of "intrapreneurs" — people who build new businesses within established companies — and discuss acquisition entrepreneurship, where people buy existing small businesses instead of starting from scratch. Whether you want to start a side hustle, position yourself for a promotion, or eventually launch your own company, Rosenkopf's framework shows multiple paths to creating value through innovation. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Entrepreneurship myths (1:28) Data on successful entrepreneur ages (2:10) Seven entrepreneur archetypes  (3:09) Defining entrepreneurship through value creation (5:27) The disruptor model  (8:13) Direct-to-consumer origins (11:13) Bootstrapper  (14:03) Transitioning from employee to bootstrapper (18:38) AI's impact on entrepreneurship (28:27) Social entrepreneur  (35:31) Technology commercializer  (39:45) The Funder  (43:12) The Acquirer  (58:06) Intrapreneurship  (1:03:12) Finding your entrepreneurial calling (1:14:40) Six Rs of entrepreneurial mindset (1:19:50) More information For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode634 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#633: Paul is worried the private equity investment he’s about to make could be a scam. How can he do his due diligence and stay protected when there’s a shortage of reliable information? Rob is questioning the purpose of a bond allocation in his eight-figure investment portfolio. Is he on to something, or is there a legitimate case to add them? Dan can retire in a few years, but he’s itching to do it now. Would buying a business be the key to unlocking an earlier exit from his W2? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! Resources: Interview with Dr. Eric Cole Interview with Katie Gatti Tassin P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode633 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Your Next Raise is open for enrollment! ⁠https://affordanything.com/how-to-negotiate-your-next-raise #632: There are 10 conversations that a person should have at work in order to do a better job, have better relationships at work, and make more money. Melody Wilding, Professor of Human Behavior at Hunter College, joins us to talk about how you can get the most out of your boss. Resources: Managing Up by Melody Wilding: managingup.com Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) The 10 Conversations Framework (02:37) Shifting Workplace Dynamics (06:11) Key Conversations for Alignment (10:02) Understanding Your Boss’s Priorities (12:02) Mapping Stakeholder Influence (15:28) Visibility and Proximity Bias (20:31) Managing Shifting Priorities (22:11) Understanding Boss Archetypes (28:01) Navigating Personality Frameworks (32:06) Articulating Your Communication Style (35:03) Taking Ownership and Suggesting Ideas (39:59) Building a Reputation Through Ownership (45:03) Setting and Framing Boundaries (56:01) The Ripple Effect of Unaddressed Issues (59:00) Feedback Conversations (01:03:02) Recapping the Framework Steps (01:11:09) Building Your Story Bank (01:18:01) Advancement and Compensation Conversations (01:25:15) Framing Your Compensation Request (01:29:00) Navigating Policy-Based Responses (01:31:51) Creative Compensation Solutions (01:34:29) Knowing When to Leave (01:36:13) Assessing Future Opportunities For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode632 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Your Next Raise now open for enrollment! https://affordanything.com/how-to-negotiate-your-next-raise #631: Jason's analysis of his retirement plan shows that the simple path beats the efficient frontier. Is he right or is he missing something? Minerva is worried about the impacts of tax inefficiency to her wealth. Are her investments properly located? Scott feels frozen because he doesn’t understand the nuances of the efficient frontier. Where can he get a simplified explainer so he can start taking action? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. Resources Mentioned: https://affordanything.com/how-to-negotiate-your-next-raise/ ⁠https://affordanything.kit.com/assetlocation ⁠Join Paula at Acorns and get your $5 bonus!⁠ https://affordanything.com/577-qa-the-efficient-frontier-was-perfect-until-hr-got-involved/ https://affordanything.com/547-ask-paula-we-have-2-million-at-40-now-what/ https://www.whitecoatinvestor.com/small-cap-value-etf/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Special bonus episode. The Bureau of Labor Statistics issues massive job revisions on Friday morning. The revisions wipe out nearly 90% of previously reported gains for May and June. This raises fundamental questions about how our most trusted economic data gets calculated. In this episode, we break down how the system works. We examine why the revisions are so large. We explore what this means for understanding the real economy. Friday arrives. The BLS delivers what appears routine: 73,000 new positions added in July. But the revisions tell a different story. May's initially reported 144,000 job gains become 19,000. June's seemingly solid 147,000 drops to just 14,000. These represent 87-90% overestimates. They fundamentally alter the economic picture for those months. The BLS surveys 560,000 businesses each month. They use payroll data from the 12th of the month. But only 60-73% of those businesses respond by the initial release deadline. The remaining portion gets filled through statistical modeling. The models rely on historical patterns. This approach typically produces revisions in the 20,000-50,000 range. But throughout 2025, average monthly revisions reach 66,000. That's triple the normal size. The statistical models aren't capturing current economic conditions effectively. The problem becomes clear when economic conditions shift rapidly. Historical patterns become unreliable guides. The 2024 annual revision was the largest since 2009. What happened in 2009? The Great Recession. Another period when traditional forecasting tools struggled with rapid change. ADP is a private payroll processor. They serve 460,000 companies. They provide useful comparison data. For May, their 37,000 private-sector job estimate aligns reasonably well with BLS's revised 19,000 total. For June, ADP reports a 33,000 job loss. BLS shows a 14,000 gain. ADP's independent data helps validate the revised numbers while highlighting the magnitude of the initial errors. These numbers drive real decisions. Federal Reserve officials use employment data for interest rate policy. Investors allocate capital based on these reports. Workers make career decisions based on perceived labor market strength. When the initial data misses by 90%, everyone operates with fundamentally flawed information. The revisions expose how fragile our economic measurement systems become when conditions change faster than models can adapt. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#630: Interesting observations about the current housing market, meme stocks (again), GDP, Fed Meeting, Stock Market, and the latest Jobs Report updates. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. 00:00 Introduction to Economic Turmoil 01:21 Jobs Report According to the BLS 09:23 Impact of Tariff Negotiations 12:36 The Broader Trade Landscape 16:04 Stock Market Reactions 24:11 GDP and Inflation Insights 31:52 The Fed’s Steady Hand (Interest Rates) 39:55 Housing Market Dynamics 39:40 Affordability Crisis in Real Estate 50:23 The Return of Meme Stocks Resource mentioned: Spencer Jakab on The GameStop Revolution For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode630 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#629: Here's the thing about personal finance advice: what works when you have $10,000 won't work when you have $1 million.  Yet most financial guidance treats everyone the same, whether you're scraping together a $1,000 emergency fund or deciding whether to upgrade to business class. Nick Maggiulli, author of "The Wealth Ladder," joins us to break down how money strategies must evolve as your net worth grows. He's mapped out 6 distinct wealth levels, each requiring different approaches to spending, saving and investing. The levels start simple.  Level 1 covers anyone with less than $10,000 in net worth — that's 20 percent of American households. Here, bad luck gets amplified. A flat tire that costs $200 could spiral into job loss and debt if you can't afford the repair. Level 2 spans $10,000 to $100,000 in net worth. Maggiulli calls this "grocery freedom" — you can splurge on the nicer eggs without checking your bank balance.  Level 3, from $100,000 to $1 million, brings "restaurant freedom."  Level 4, the $1 million to $10 million range, unlocks "travel freedom." Getting beyond Level 4 — into the $10 million-plus territory — requires business ownership or extreme patience. Maggiulli calculates that even saving $100,000 annually after hitting $1 million takes 23 years to reach $10 million, assuming 5 percent annual returns. The data shows income matters more than frugality, especially in the early levels. The median household income in Level 1 is $32,000, but in Level 4 it's $197,000, and in Level 6 it reaches $4.3 million. We discuss why homeownership dominates wealth in Levels 2 and 3, how investment assets become crucial in higher levels, and why many people in Level 4 choose "Coast FIRE" over the grinding path to Level 5. Resource Mentioned: Nick's book: The Wealth Ladder: Proven Strategies for Every Step of Your Financial Life Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Introduction to wealth ladder concept (1:35) The 0.01% daily spending rule (3:43) Six wealth levels breakdown (7:35) Level 1 survival mode focus (11:21) Six levels population data (13:02) Level 1 bad luck amplification (15:08) Level 2 skills development priority (17:55) Income and wealth correlation data (25:28) Level 2 education strategies (28:05) Income opportunity heuristics discussion (32:24) Level 2 mobility statistics (36:38) Asset composition shifts by level (39:28) Level 3 to 4 progression (46:52) Level 3 and 4 similarities (50:14) Level 4 to 5 math (53:29) Business ownership requirements for Level 5 (56:07) Level 5 and 6 non-monetary focus (59:07) Wealth movement bidirectional data (64:09) Key takeaways summary begins For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode629 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#628: You follow all the right personal finance advice. You know you should save more, invest regularly, and build an emergency fund. So why does it feel so much harder for some people than others? The answer lies in your personality. Dr. Sandra Matz, a professor at Columbia Business School, studies the intersection of psychology and money management. She joins us to explain why one-size-fits-all financial advice often fails. Her research found that agreeable people — those who are caring, empathetic, and put others first — have a harder time saving money. The solution isn't better budgeting apps or stricter rules. It's reframing financial goals to match your personality type. For example, agreeable people save more effectively when they view their emergency fund as protection for loved ones or a way to help others during tough times. By contrast, competitive personalities respond better to framing savings as getting ahead in life. This personalized approach extends beyond personality assessments. Algorithms can now predict your financial behavior using digital footprints — social media activity, spending patterns, even smartphone usage. With just 300 Facebook likes, artificial intelligence understands your money habits better than your spouse does. The conversation also covers the darker implications. Companies exploit these same psychological insights to manipulate spending decisions. Dr. Matz discusses data cooperatives as a solution — member-owned entities where people collectively benefit from their shared information. We dive into negotiation strategies for salary increases, breaking out of financial echo chambers, and using AI to optimize your money management without losing your decision-making autonomy. Resources Mentioned: Dr. Matz's book "Mind Masters" sandramatz.com Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Big data meets financial psychology (3:34) Psychology and computer science intersection (6:26) Algorithms vs spouses at predicting personality (7:21) Curly fries predict intelligence (9:01) Self-talk reveals emotional distress (11:04) Nice people struggle with money (14:03) Personality-based savings strategies (22:21) Privacy versus convenience tradeoffs (24:36) Data privacy management burden (26:28) Organ donation defaults (30:40) Data cooperatives concept (36:01) ChatGPT for financial advice (40:04) AI as unlimited intern (44:06) Breaking financial echo chambers (53:14) AI negotiation training For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode628 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#627: Jlyn and her husband are 20 years from retirement, but they’ve got their eye on a second home they’ll live in when the time comes. Should they make the purchase now, or keep saving? Reese was recently laid off, and she’s struggling to choose between two financially responsible paths. Should she continue her long-term disability insurance? Or is it wiser to save money? Kip’s youngest has finally graduated from college, and he’s looking forward to an early retirement. But, with the eyewatering costs of long-term healthcare, is this still a viable path?  Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. Resource mentioned: Reese's original question in Episode 417 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#626: A software programmer and an accountant walk into retirement planning. Are they being creative? Dr. Zorana Ivcevic Pringle, a senior research scientist at Yale University's Center for Emotional Intelligence, says absolutely. Pringle defines creativity as something that's both original and effective, whether you're solving an accounting problem or planning an unconventional retirement. We explore the gap between having ideas and actually implementing them. You have this brilliant vision for starting a business, changing careers, or retiring early, but somehow you never take the first step. Pringle calls this the implementation gap, and she explains why it happens. The conversation centers on a hypothetical couple: both 55 years old, one a programmer, the other in middle management. They want to retire at 57 and travel the world. Pringle uses this example to illustrate how creative problem-solving works in real life. She explains that creativity requires comfort with uncertainty. When you're doing something new, you don't have a blueprint or checklist. There's always the risk that your early retirement plan could fail spectacularly — imagine having to return to work at 59 after the market tanks and your portfolio gets crushed. Here's the key insight: you don't need full confidence to start. Pringle compares creative confidence to fuel in a car. You don't need a full tank — you can start with just a quarter tank and refuel along the way. Each small success builds more confidence for the next step. The bottom line? Innovation happens through constant iteration. Your final destination might change throughout your career and retirement, and that's completely normal. Resources Mentioned: https://www.zorana-ivcevic-pringle.com/ Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Implementation gap intro (1:00) Creativity beyond arts (2:00) Original plus effective (3:00) Ideas to action gap (5:00) Retirement as creativity (7:00) Openness drives creativity (8:00) Problem finding process (10:00) Big Five traits (12:00) Openness and creativity (15:00) Traits can change (18:00) Uncertainty creates risk (20:00) Courage versus comfort (23:00) Self-efficacy challenges (25:00) Quarter tank confidence (28:00) Creative failure recovery (32:00) Creative blocks (36:00) Pivoting versus quitting (39:00) Emotions as information (42:00) Metrics versus intuition (50:00) Implementation strategies Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#625: What do you do when you've reached financial independence? JL Collins says it depends entirely on your spending rate, not just your net worth. Collins joins us for part two of our conversation about what happens after you reach financial independence. He tackles the question of whether you should invest differently once you've "won the game." Someone with $5 million spending $100,000 per year sits in a completely different position than someone with the same amount spending $200,000 per year. The first person can afford to stay aggressive with stocks. The second person needs bonds to smooth the ride. Collins walks through his withdrawal strategy using his daughter as an example. She stepped away from corporate life in her early thirties and now follows an 80-20 stock/bond allocation. She pulls dividends from both funds into her checking account, covering about 2.5 percent of her target 4 percent withdrawal rate. Vanguard automatically sells shares to cover the remaining 1.5 percent. We cover Collins' thoughts on the 4 percent rule, which he calls extraordinarily conservative. He references Bill Bengen's research showing that 5 percent withdrawals succeed 86 percent of the time. Collins would take those odds to escape a soul-crushing job, especially since most financially independent people end up accidentally making money anyway. We discuss the tension between frugal habits that build wealth – and learning to spend money once you have it. Collins flies first class, but he drives a basic car. Collins explains why financially independent people often stay engaged with work — the problem was never work itself, but working without agency. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Intro (2:00) Investing when you've won the game (5:30) Spending rate versus total wealth (8:00) Three-year versus ten-year timelines (11:00) Adding bonds gradually or all at once (14:00) Why 4 percent is extraordinarily conservative (17:00) Soul crushing jobs and 5 percent risk (24:16) Withdrawal frequency and dividends (27:16) Automatic share sales setup (31:16) Starting business while financially independent (36:16) Accidentally making money after retirement (47:09) Agency versus having to work (50:09) Spending advice for frugal philanthropists (54:09) Charity auction magnifying effect Resources Mentioned: https://affordanything.com/377-how-i-discovered-the-4-percent-retirement-rule-with-bill-bengen/ https://affordanything.com/bill-bengen-created-the-4-rule-now-he-thinks-we-can-withdraw-more/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#624: JL Collins, author of "The Simple Path to Wealth" — the guy synonymous with VTSAX and chill — joins us for Part 1 of a two-part series where we skip the basics and dive straight into the complex stuff. We ask him whether his simple approach actually beats more sophisticated strategies, and his answer might surprise you. He says that Paul Merriman's four-fund portfolio probably outperforms his one-fund approach mathematically. But Collins argues that execution trumps optimization every time. Most people can't stick with complex strategies for 20 years, he says, especially when those strategies require selling winners to buy losers – something that goes against human nature. Collins prioritizes what works in real life over what looks good on paper. He calls index funds "self-cleansing" because they automatically rotate out failing companies and sectors while rotating in the new winners. You don't need to predict which companies will dominate next – you'll own whatever rises to the top. The episode covers his thoughts on VTSAX versus VTI, international diversification, and why he'd rather put Tabasco than Cholula on his eggs — his quirky way of explaining personal preferences in nearly identical investment options. Resources Mentioned: Episode 31, Interview in 2016 with JL Collins Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Intro (1:00) The efficient frontier (2:00) Simple vs optimal but complex paths (4:30) Paul Merriman's four-fund portfolio vs VTSAX (6:00) JL says Merriman's approach is mathematically superior but not behaviorally (7:30) Risk parity investing discussion (8:30) Sequence of returns risk and retirement bonds (12:30) JL's birthday email from Jack Bogle (15:00) VTSAX vs VTI  (17:00) Total stock market funds across brokerages (23:30) Mag 7 concentration risk (27:00) Sears story and self-cleansing index funds (30:30) International diversification and US dominance (39:00) World funds versus separate international (45:00) When to shift to world fund (47:30) Bond allocation timing strategies (48:30) Target date funds  (50:30) One-fund vs two-fund approach (52:00) Historical diversification and Nifty 50 For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode624 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#623: An anonymous caller feels trapped in a no-win situation with her financially reckless mother. She has the means to bail her out, but it doesn’t feel right. What should she do?  Shannon is excited about investing in several companies overseas. But she can only access them using American Depository Receipts. What are they, and how do they work?  Jennifer calls back with an update on putting a vacation on a credit card and playing the rewards game. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#622: #622: The headlines said America added 147,000 jobs in June. The reality? Private companies actually cut 33,000 positions. Grad students just lost access to unlimited borrowing. Parent PLUS loans now cap at $65,000. And tariffs are about to jump as high as 70 percent. Everything is changing at once — taxes, tariffs, student loans, and immigration policy. And data from the University of Michigan says that consumers feel more pessimistic than they did six months ago. Welcome to the 4th of July First Friday episode. On America's 249th birthday, we unpack these economic stories. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Introduction (1:19) Historical trivia about the Declaration of Independence (2:28) Three presidents died on July 4th — statistical improbability explained (4:24) Trump signs domestic policy bill extending 2017 tax cuts (6:13) Student loan changes — borrowing caps and repayment plan eliminations (8:53) Tariff pause expires July 9th, new rates announced (12:00) Original tariff rates and Lesotho example breakdown (16:26) June jobs report headlines versus private sector reality (22:54) ADP reports private job losses while government hiring grows (26:46) Consumer confidence drops 18 percent since December (30:59) Inflation expectations versus actual 2.4 percent rate (34:19) Fed takes wait-and-see approach amid policy uncertainty (36:58) Labor market stagnation mirrors Federal Reserve strategy For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode622 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

DOWNLOAD the FREE Cheat Sheet: ASSET LOCATION MADE SIMPLE at affordanything.com/assetlocation #621: Jared is attracted to the favorable terms of the annuity plan that his employer offers, but he’s hesitant to pay the opportunity cost of locking up his money now. What should he do? An anonymous caller is struggling to find the efficient frontier with only three funds to choose from in his Thrift Savings Plan. Is there any hope for him? Jack feels great about the funds in his portfolio, but he’s losing sleep over how to apportion them between his taxable, pre-tax and Roth accounts. What’s the best tax strategy for him? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#620: You probably think your value to your employer equals your paycheck. Katie Gatti Tassin has news for you — you're worth way more than that. The host of "Money with Katie" recently joined us to break down a framework that could change how you negotiate forever. Her formula is simple: Your worth equals your market rate plus what it costs to replace you, raised to the power of your unique skills. Most people focus only on market rate — what similar jobs pay in your area. You can find this through salary transparency laws, LinkedIn data, or job postings. But that's just the starting point. The real eye-opener? Replacement costs. When you leave, companies face recruiting fees, interview time, onboarding expenses, and lost productivity. For mid-level roles, recruiters charge 15 to 25 percent of your first-year salary. Senior positions cost even more — headhunters for executive roles charge 25 to 35 percent of total compensation. A company replacing an $80,000 employee might pay $20,000 just in recruiter fees. For a $200,000 executive, that jumps to $70,000. Add training time and the productivity gap while they search, and replacement costs can hit 50 to 200 percent of annual salary. Then there's your "special sauce" — the unique value you bring. Maybe you have deep client relationships, specialized skills, or institutional knowledge that would take months for a replacement to develop. Katie learned this framework through her own career pivots. She started as an ad copywriter but shifted into user experience writing after working closely with a UX designer who told her the pay was much better. That internal pivot positioned her for an external move that doubled her compensation from $70,000 to $140,000. Katie had to catch a flight — she visited our New York studios during her book launch tour — but the conversation covers practical tactics for earning more and building wealth. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode620 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#619: Dave is no longer happy with his financial advisor, but he’s nervous about switching over to self-management after being completely hands-off for so long. What should he do? An anonymous caller keeps hearing about the benefits of Cost Segregation for investment property. What is it? And should he apply this strategy to his recently acquired duplex? Another anonymous caller is eagerly anticipating a windfall from his employer’s upcoming IPO. How should he prepare for this, and what happens if it fails? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode619 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

DOWNLOAD the RISK PARITY PORTFOLIO CHEAT SHEET at affordanything.com/riskparity ______________ #618: Frank Vasquez watched his parents, ages 91 and 96, struggle financially in retirement. They were immigrants. His dad was a physician. They raised five kids. They retired in the early 1990’s. But by 2009, they ran out of money. When Frank was 45, in 2009, his parents would call asking for money to help make ends meet. This reality hit Frank hard and sparked a decade-long quest to crack the code on sustainable retirement withdrawals. At age 45, Frank set an ambitious goal: retire in his early 50’s while still supporting his parents financially. The problem? Most financial experts simply told people to spend less rather than optimize their portfolios for higher withdrawal rates. Frank wasn't satisfied with that answer. You'll hear how Frank discovered that many retirees leave money on the table by holding too much cash or following overly conservative allocation models. Through extensive research, he found a sweet spot for stock allocation that maximizes safe withdrawal rates — something most traditional advisors miss entirely. Frank walks us through his approach to portfolio construction, explaining why he believes in balancing growth and value stocks while keeping bonds limited to US treasuries for recession protection. He breaks down the math behind safe withdrawal rates and reveals why property taxes pose a hidden threat to retirement security as home values climb. You'll learn about risk parity strategies, macro allocation principles, and why diversification across uncorrelated assets creates more stability than traditional 60/40 portfolios. The conversation covers Frank's Golden Ratio Portfolio, a structured approach to asset allocation designed specifically for the retirement drawdown phase. Frank figured out how to fix what went wrong with his parents' retirement. His approach could help you avoid the same mistakes. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Introduction (01:04) Frank's parents' financial struggles (05:21) Finding a sustainable retirement portfolio (10:19) Learning from market crashes (13:25) Different types of investments (25:10) Building the perfect portfolio (32:25) Frank's real-world example (39:24) Property taxes and retirement goals (44:21) Safe withdrawal rate basics (45:22) How much to put in stocks (51:03) Why bonds matter (54:23) Adding alternative investments (1:00:14) The Golden Ratio Portfolio (1:12:11) Investment strategies for retirement (1:15:44) Taking money out of your portfolio (1:18:31) Taxes on withdrawals (1:21:14) Where to put your investments (1:23:35) Keeping it simple (1:26:07) How much cash to hold (1:28:20) Market timing risks (1:34:38) Giving back in retirement For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode618 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#617: Austin and his wife are worried about moving to a single-income household while supporting two kids. Should they free up cash flow by paying off a car loan, or tighten up and stay the course? Paul has been retired for seven years, but still can’t shake his anxiety about not having enough. Is there a good way to know when he’s finally escaped the dreaded sequence of returns risk? Jonathan wants to build up his taxable brokerage account, but he’s having trouble letting go of the tax benefits of a Roth IRA. How does he get past his psychological hurdles? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#616: Two school teachers in Ohio saved their entire lives for one dream — buying a farm.  When they inherited $1.3 million and found the perfect property for $1.2 million, everything seemed perfect.  Five days before closing, they received what looked like a legitimate email from their closing company with wire transfer instructions. They sent the money and showed up at closing, only to discover they'd been scammed.  The email was fake, sent by hackers who had infiltrated the closing company's servers for months, waiting for exactly this type of high-value cash deal. That story comes from cybersecurity expert Dr. Eric Cole, who joins us to explain why ordinary people have become prime targets for cybercriminals.  Cole, a former CIA hacker who served as cybersecurity commissioner under President Barack Obama and advises high-profile clients including Bill Gates' personal estate, has a message: if you think you're too small to be targeted, you're wrong. While billion-dollar companies deploy teams of 60 cybersecurity professionals, you have virtually no protection.  Criminals know this. They're not trying to steal $100 million from one person anymore — they're stealing $50 from thousands of people every month.  You probably won't notice the small amounts vanishing from your accounts. Cole calls it "death by a thousand cuts," and it's happening right now. We talk through the most common attacks targeting your money. Bank hacking is simpler than most people realize. All criminals need is your account number — printed on every check you write — and your password. With that information, they can often perform electronic fund transfers of up to 50 percent of your account balance without triggering alerts. We also cover the China-TikTok connection, secure messaging options, and why Cole helped configure President Obama's smartphone to connect to fake cell towers that masked his actual location. Cole's bottom line: cybersecurity isn't just for tech companies anymore. Criminals are targeting ordinary people because we're easier prey than heavily protected corporations. Your money is under threat. Here's how to protect it.  Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Introduction (1:17) Why ordinary people are cybercrime targets (2:29) The "death by a thousand cuts"  (4:05) How criminals destroy your credit with fake accounts (5:19) Cryptocurrency wallet attacks and empty life savings (6:08) Elder scams and the devastating impact on families (8:24) Different types of cyber attacks explained (8:44) Bank hacking  (14:25) Phishing scams using fake toll messages (18:53) Ransomware as a legitimate Russian business (23:44) How scams and cybersecurity overlap (35:31) Paula's phone security audit  (49:54) Smartphone security for high-profile individuals (54:55) TikTok's data collection and Chinese government access (59:44) Real estate scams targeting cash buyers (1:12:18) Essential security rules  (1:27:05) What to keep in a fireproof safe https://affordanything.com/episode616 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#615: Emily is nervous that buying their first home will derail her family’s journey to financial independence. What’s the smartest way to deploy their savings and stay on track? Based on cap rate calculations, Paul’s real estate investments have appreciated beyond their sensible holding point. Should he sell his assets, or is there more to consider here? Mike is recently retired while his wife still works. With a paid-off home and healthcare already taken care of, what are best practices for drawing down an investment portfolio?   Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode615https://affordanything.com/episode615 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#614: The US just added 139,000 new jobs in May. That beat expectations. But the real story isn't in the job numbers — it’s in the bond market. Something unusual is happening in bonds. Treasury yields are spiking. The dollar is weakening. That combination almost never happens together. And it's signaling concerns about future inflation. Trade wars continue on. A federal court just struck down some tariffs. The administration will appeal. Meanwhile, the EU has until July 9 to cut a deal. If they don't, 50 percent tariffs kick in. As a result, many companies are playing defense instead of growing. The debt situation keeps getting worse. We owe $36.2 trillion. That's more than we owed at the end of World War II as a percentage of our economy. Moody's just downgraded our credit rating. We're not alone — Britain's bonds just hit their highest levels since 1998. The accredited investor rules could finally change. Right now you need an income of $200,000 ($300,000 as a couple) or $1 million in net worth to access private markets. Those numbers haven't changed since they were written in 1982, even though adjusted for inflation, that $200,000 would be $662,000 today.  The SEC might start loosening enforcement of the accredited investor rules. That could open up more investments to people who've been locked out for decades. Crypto is finding its footing. The SEC dropped cases against Coinbase. They're backing away from treating most crypto like securities. Bitcoin sits near all-time highs. The US keeps building its strategic Bitcoin reserve. The House just passed what's being called the "One Big Beautiful Bill." It extends 2017 tax cuts. Eliminates taxes on tips and overtime. The Congressional Budget Office says it'll add $2.4 trillion to the deficit over 10 years. That's sparked debate between deficit hawks and growth advocates —  including one particularly high-profile debate that has been plastered across the headlines. Consumer sentiment stays stuck at 2022 lows. People expect 6.6 percent inflation. The actual rate is 2.3 percent. That gap between what the data says and what people feel shows up everywhere. We cover all of this in today’s First Friday economic update.  For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode614 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#613: Rachel Rodgers graduated from law school with $330,000 in student loans. Her starting salary? Just $41,000. Most people would have accepted this crushing debt-to-income ratio. They'd slowly chip away at payments for decades. Rodgers had a different plan. She deferred her loans and started her own virtual law practice in 2008 — during the recession, when jobs were scarce and most lawyers were struggling to find work.  Her mom thought she was crazy.  Her first year, she made around $65,000 in gross revenue with only $300 in overhead costs. By year two, she was earning $300,000. The key to her success wasn't cutting expenses or living on rice and beans. Rodgers focused entirely on earning more money.  We talk about the practical steps she took to scale her business.  She waited until hitting $250,000 in annual revenue before bringing on her first full-time employee — an administrative assistant who immediately paid for herself by responding to client inquiries faster than Rodgers could manage alone. Rodgers also shares insights from a CEO's perspective on what employees should know when asking for a raise.  Understand your company's goals. Know your boss's pain points. When you spot a problem, bring three solutions — not just the issue. She usually goes with whatever option her team recommends. "You are the asset," she explains. This mindset applies whether you're an entrepreneur or an employee trying to maximize your career potential. Our interview covers her transition from solopreneur to multimillion-dollar business owner, her approach to leading employees, and her philosophy on building wealth through entrepreneurship rather than cost-cutting. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Introduction (2:00) Rachel's $330,000 debt with $41,000 salary  (5:35) Why earning more beats cutting expenses  (6:40) Starting solo law practice during 2008 recession (9:13) Hitting $300,000 revenue in year two (11:00) Debt payments versus business reinvestment  (14:20) Small Business Bodyguard digital product success story (21:00) Virtual law offices and perfect timing decisions (24:30) Taking calculated risks  (39:00) Financial independence and Fat FIRE goals (46:00) When to hire employees  (53:00) Why opportunity costs matter more than expenses (57:00) Being invaluable employee from boss POV (1:11:00) Salary negotiation tactics (1:19:00) Building relationships with remote team members (1:21:00) Launching adult kids into financial independence Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Grant Sabatier never worked in retail, never worked in a bookstore, and had no idea what he was doing when he opened Clintonville Books in Columbus, Ohio. But that's exactly the point. The experiment required 1,200 hours of solo work — measuring spaces, moving 40,000 books, and navigating city regulations. But it taught him something crucial: even experienced entrepreneurs face steep learning curves when they try something new. The serial entrepreneur and author of "Inner Entrepreneur" joins us to share his unconventional journey from online businesses to brick-and-mortar retail. He also explains why he believes everyone will become an entrepreneur within the next decade — whether they want to or not. We dive deep into Sabatier's framework for the four stages of entrepreneurship. The first stage is experimental — you're figuring out how entrepreneurship feels and testing ideas with minimal risk. Most people skip the crucial research phase and invest too much money too quickly. The second stage focuses on building sustainable systems as a solopreneur. Thanks to AI and modern tools, Sabatier launched a new website in 10 minutes recently — something that would have taken two weeks just five years ago. Stage three involves intentional growth. Sabatier warns against the common trap of scaling rapidly without considering how you want entrepreneurship to fit into your life. The final stage is empire entrepreneurship — using cash flow from successful businesses to acquire other companies rather than investing in traditional assets like stocks or real estate. Throughout our conversation, we explore the most common reasons businesses fail, how to avoid fragmented attention, and why Sabatier believes your story is your competitive advantage in an AI-driven world. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Introduction (01:15) Grant opens bookstore with zero retail experience (03:45) Four stages of entrepreneurship framework (05:20) Creative lease negotiation and getting the space (08:30) Why entrepreneurs invest too much money too early (10:45) Stage two solopreneur and building systems (13:20) Stage three growth and avoiding scaling traps (17:15) Three main reasons businesses die (21:45) Stage four empire building and holding companies (28:30) Four types of holding company structures (32:15) Managing multiple businesses without losing focus (48:20) Why everyone should try entrepreneurship (59:30) Three business types products services productized services (01:04:45) Sell to people with money For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode612https://affordanything.com/episode612 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#611: With the state of the world changing so rapidly, Lesley is struggling to accept that “this time isn’t different.” Does the past still reliably inform the present in the face of major decisions today? An anonymous caller and her husband want to achieve financial independence through real estate within 10 years. Is it better to pay off existing mortgages or prioritize buying more rentals? Melanie feels duped by the FICO credit scoring system. She’s doing all the right things, but her credit score is still moving in the wrong direction. What’s going on here? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode611https://affordanything.com/episode611 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

In 2005, Sebastien Page nearly died from a mysterious bacterial infection that doctors couldn't diagnose for a week. A single observant physician noticed cuts on his toes from running in wet terrain and connected the dots. The experience forced Page to confront mortality — and completely changed how he thinks about goals. Page, the chief investment officer at T. Rowe Price and author of The Psychology of Leadership, joins us to share why traditional goal-setting might be sabotaging your happiness. He explains how 80 percent of millennials say they just want to get rich, and 50 percent want to become famous. But research from Harvard's 80-year longitudinal study reveals something surprising: people who climbed the social ladder weren't meaningfully happier than those who struggled financially. The real predictor of long-term happiness? The quality of your relationships with others. We explore the dark side of goals through a concept called "goal-induced blindness." Page uses Mount Everest as an example — climbers have a 4 percent chance of dying, the same odds as eating four poisoned gummies out of 100. Yet people still attempt the summit because they become blinded by the goal itself. Page shares his own experience with goal-induced blindness during his demanding career in money management. The relentless travel and pressure contributed to his near-fatal infection in 2005. He learned that working less actually made him more productive. We dive into Page's framework called the "three Cs": core beliefs, curves, and control theory. Core beliefs are the filters through which you interpret the world — like whether you trust people or believe money should be spent versus saved. Curves refer to stress management, based on research showing optimal performance doesn't happen at zero stress. Control theory teaches you when to exercise "strategic patience" versus making quick decisions. Page also introduces the PERMA framework from positive psychology: positive emotions, engagement, relationships, meaning, and accomplishment. He calls the last four "proteins for your soul," while positive emotions are more like a sugar high. The discussion covers practical applications for everything from hiring decisions to relationship choices, using mathematical concepts like net present value to make better life decisions. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Eva is approaching financial independence, but she’s worried about messing up the transition. How does she set her portfolio up for success during the drawdown years of early retirement? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I deep-dive into this question in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. Episodes about the Efficient Frontier: https://affordanything.com/577-qa-the-efficient-frontier-was-perfect-until-hr-got-involved https://affordanything.com/357-practical-investing-and-the-efficient-frontier-with-joe-saul-sehy https://affordanything.com/380-ask-paula-how-to-optimize-your-investments-along-the-efficient-frontier-if-you-dare https://affordanything.com/episode597 https://affordanything.com/episode567 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#608: At age seven, Robert Rosenkrantz made a decision that would shape his entire life: he would take full responsibility for his future.As a child, Rosenkrantz watched his parents struggle financially. His father was unemployed for two years, and his mother worked as a drugstore clerk.Their financial insecurity was painfully obvious to young Robert. He never knew if the electricity or telephone service would be shut off.But rather than seeing this as an obstacle, he saw it as a path to self-reliance.By age 14, Rosenkrantz was managing investments for his family. By 35, he had amassed $400,000 — equivalent to about $4 million today. Then came the pivotal moment that changed everything: a negotiation with wealthy entrepreneur Joe Mailman.When Mailman expressed concerns about traditional investment structures that created a "heads you win, tails I lose" scenario, Rosenkrantz made a bold counter-offer. He put his entire liquid net worth at risk in exchange for a 50/50 profit split with no carried interest."First deal, we lost $100,000. The second one, we made $100 million," Rosenkrantz says during the interview. "So it averaged out."Now 82, Rosenkrantz joins us to discuss his book, "The Stoic Capitalist," and the principles that guided his career.For over 35 years, he's carried the same negotiation card from "Getting to Yes" in his wallet — a reminder that negotiation isn't about winning, but solving problems together.We talk about his counterintuitive investment philosophy: look for companies that require minimal specialized talent, like laundromats or self-storage facilities. He says these often make better investments than those needing exceptional management, like restaurants.This principle guided his first major success, a lawn and garden products business that essentially put dirt in bags — a simple operation that became a regional monopoly and eventually sold for $100 million.Today, Rosenkrantz funds scientific research on longevity and hosts debate programs that present balanced perspectives on contentious issues. His philanthropy includes backing a groundbreaking study that has extended worm lifespans from 15 days to over 250 days — potentially the longest lifespan extension ever achieved in any organism.When asked about retirement, he responds: "How do you spell that?"His advice for decision-making comes straight from stoic philosophy: focus only on what you can control — the present and future, not the past. This means disregarding sunk costs completely when making decisions and using reason to regulate emotions. For Rosenkrantz, counting the zeros — focusing only on opportunities with enough potential impact — helps prioritize time and delegate effectively. At 82, he still practices these principles daily, considering himself "biologically more like 70 and getting younger." For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode608 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#607: George is a worried baby boomer, wondering if today’s generation is drowning in the noise of today’s financial landscape. How does one find a balance between information and overload? Heather is stunned by the notion that renting could make more financial sense than buying. Where she’s from, the numbers seem to always swing in favor of owning. What’s she missing? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode607 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#606: Hospice nurse and end-of-life educator Suzanne O’Brien joins us to discuss the financial realities of dying in America — and they might surprise you. Remember Aretha Franklin? Her handwritten will was found in her couch cushions after she passed away. Despite her substantial wealth, this simple document was legally upheld. It's a powerful reminder that having any form of will is better than none at all. But there's more to worry about than just having a will or trust. The costs of aging and dying can add up fast. Long-term care costs can quickly deplete even substantial savings. Suzanne shares a story about a couple with over $5 million who were shocked to learn how quickly 24/7 care for dementia would consume their nest egg. Traditional funerals average between $7,000-$11,000, but there are much more affordable alternatives: Home wakes and natural burials can cost just a few hundred dollars Water cremation offers an environmentally friendly option Whole body donation to medical institutions costs nothing while contributing to education Planning ahead gives you control over these decisions and spares your loved ones additional stress. Multi-generational living arrangements can also reduce caregiving costs and address concerns like isolation and safety for aging family members. Suzanne also shares stories about the emotional side of dying. Did you know some people seem to choose when they go? She tells us about a 99-year-old woman in a coma who somehow held on for days until she turned 100, then passed away that very night. Resources Mentioned: Anatomical Board of the State of Florida » College of Medicine » University of Florida US Programs » Anatomical Board of the State of Florida » College of Medicine » University of Florida NATIONAL HOME FUNERAL ALLIANCE - Home https://affordanything.com/episode606 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#605: In light of recent federal mandates to return to the office, Pedro is having a hard time giving up on his fully remote lifestyle. Is there a creative solution to his dilemma?  An anonymous caller is excited to move abroad permanently. How should she structure her investments to support her international lifestyle while maintaining a home base in the US? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode605https://affordanything.com/episode605 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#604: The biggest trade shake-up in 135 years is happening right now. April brought tariff levels that economists say haven't been seen since the 1890s, creating ripple effects throughout the economy. We're seeing a stark disconnect between official economic data and how people feel about their financial future. While the economy added 177,000 jobs in April — beating forecasts — consumer confidence has plummeted to alarming levels. Almost 70 percent of Americans now expect higher unemployment ahead, despite the strong job numbers. The tariffs have triggered some unexpected behaviors. Companies rushed to import goods before prices increased, which ironically pushed the trade deficit to record levels. Consumers went on buying sprees for cars, computers, and other expensive items, fearing they'd soon cost much more. Meanwhile, inflation expectations have surged to their highest levels in decades. What does this mean for investors? Bond markets reacted dramatically, with Treasury yields posting one of the sharpest spikes on record mid-April before settling back down. The dollar weakened significantly, and economists have raised recession probability to 45 percent — up from 30 percent just last month. Small businesses are feeling the uncertainty too. After initial optimism about potential tax cuts and deregulation, their expectations have soured amid concerns about how tariffs might hurt smaller firms disproportionately. Market volatility has hit retirement savers particularly hard. We take a call from a listener named Johanna who shared that she lost 30 percent of her portfolio due to recent tariff-related swings. She’s wondering whether she’s still "Coast FIRE" — even when market shocks alter her retirement math. Join us as we break down April's economic data, explain what's behind the market volatility, and discuss what these historic tariffs might mean for your money in the months ahead. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) The Economic Experiment (02:00) April 2025 Job Gains (05:41) Interest Rate Forecast (07:04) Benefit of Roth Conversions during market declines (08:17) Tariffs and the Smoot-Hawley Tariff Act (13:23) The Bond Market (17:49) The Dollar’s Decline (19:31) Economist's Recession Predictions (22:20) Consumer Sentiment (25:29) Consumer Spending Rises (27:13) Is Johanna still FIRE after the drop? For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode604https://affordanything.com/episode604 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#603: Bethany’s partner wants to invest most of their money in gold and silver, but no one seems to talk about this kind of investing. Is this a red flag or a potential opportunity?  Diana is worried she’s been saving too much for her kids’ college - hundreds of dollars a month since they were born. How does she know when to stop?   Wendy’s pension and social security will cover all her basic expenses during retirement. Does the four percent rule still apply to her discretionary nest egg, or is there another approach? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode603 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#602: Ever looked back at an old Facebook post and cringed? According to Olga Khazan, staff writer at The Atlantic, that discomfort is evidence of something powerful: your personality has changed, even if you didn't notice it happening. In our latest episode, Khazan, who recently wrote a book on the science of personality change, breaks down how our personalities aren't fixed traits but flexible characteristics we can intentionally shift to achieve our goals. The conversation centers on the "Big Five" personality traits — Openness, Conscientiousness, Extraversion, Agreeableness and Neuroticism (OCEAN) — and how they impact financial success and career advancement. If you work a regular 9-to-5, personality development can boost your career trajectory. Khazan highlights that conscientiousness — being organized, timely and detail-oriented — directly correlates with workplace success.  She suggests decluttering both your physical space and your commitments to increase productivity.  For introverts navigating office politics, she recommends "cosplaying as an extrovert" by signing up for regular group activities that are hard to back out of. Over time, social interactions become less draining, creating more opportunities for advancement.  And when engaging with colleagues, focus on asking meaningful questions about their experiences rather than collecting basic facts — this builds genuine connections that can lead to promotions and new opportunities. If you’re intimidated by new financial ventures like entrepreneurship or real estate investing, Khazan suggests learning from others who've succeeded in similar situations. Research shows you're more likely to implement strategies when you learn them from peers rather than experts.  When discussing successful entrepreneurs, Khazan reveals they typically share three key traits: high extraversion (energy for interacting with others), low agreeableness (ability to make tough decisions), and low neuroticism (emotional stability for risk-taking).  Think Steve Jobs — not always the nicest person, but his combination of vision, decisiveness and comfort with risk built one of the world's most valuable companies. The most important takeaway? Never tell yourself you can't do something because "that's just not who you are." Instead, take small daily steps toward your goal, and you'll gradually develop the personality traits needed for success. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) "The Surprising Science of Six-Figure Thinking" (1:16) What is personality - behaviors that help meet goals (2:24) Personalities change over time (3:34) Personality impacts success (4:12) OCEAN - the Big Five traits explained (5:48) Origins of personality research (8:20) Changing personality intentionally (9:52) Low vs high openness traits (12:05) Increasing openness gradually (15:36) Boosting conscientiousness strategies (23:09) Time management techniques (30:31) Extraversion benefits careers (33:19) Introvert's guide to social skills (37:25) Healthy boundaries, not people-pleasing (46:06) Meaningful conversations build connections (51:16) Reducing anxiety with mindfulness (56:52) CEO traits - extroverted, disagreeable, emotionally stable Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#601: Nick and his wife have $100,000 to invest, but they’re worried about the volatility of the current stock market. Should they look into alternative investments such as private equity? Even though Roth IRAs come with tax-free withdrawals in retirement, Josh is worried about his tax bracket going up and neutralizing the benefits. Is he right to be concerned? The retirement portion of Cindy’s financial three-legged stool is set, and she’s now focused on her taxable brokerage. What investment strategy will allow her to be work optional in 10 years? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a Question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#600: Jillian Johnsrud was falling apart. After suffering a miscarriage, she couldn't pull herself together to return to her job as a youth pastor in DC. She decided to take a month off. That unexpected break became Jillian's first "mini-retirement" — a deliberate step away from work for at least 30 days to focus on something meaningful.  Today, Jillian is a mom of six who has taken more than a dozen mini-retirements with her kids, who currently range in age from 8 to 17.  During her first mini-retirement, she and her best friend piled into her green Honda Civic and drove from DC to Seattle, leaving her 13-year-old son Micah at home with her husband. A couple years later, Jillian took Micah, then 15, to Glacier National Park in Montana for another mini-retirement. They saw mountain goats, kayaked together, and swam in ice-cold waters.  This trip created irreplaceable memories. Sadly, Micah died six years later.  His death changed how Jillian sees time. She now understands that meaningful moments don't wait for perfect timing - they either happen now or vanish forever.  Waiting for "someday" might mean missing chances forever.  This drives her philosophy about mini retirements — life contains fleeting seasons that we either embrace now or miss entirely. "To be able to share those memories with him there is priceless," Jillian tells us. This understanding shapes her approach with her other children too. From a 10-week road trip to 10 national parks in a pop-up camper to a recent six-month journey across the eastern United States with her five younger children (now ages 8-17), Jillian prioritizes experiences that fit each season of family life. Planning your own mini retirement? Jillian recommends focusing on four key areas: managing your time (pick just 2-3 priorities), addressing career logistics (craft a compelling story for your employer), saving money (about 6.5 percent of your income for a month off every other year), and preparing for emotional revelations. Jillian emphasizes the importance of separating your mini retirement fund from long-term retirement savings. This separate fund, which she calls the "in-between bucket," allows you to spend freely on experiences now rather than postponing all enjoyment until traditional retirement age. As Jillian puts it: "You can't postpone every good thing in your life." Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Introduction to mini-retirements (0:59) Definition of mini-retirement: stepping away from work for 30+ days to focus on something meaningful (3:03) Jillian shares her first mini-retirement story after experiencing personal loss (8:28) Taking time off to enjoy important life moments before they pass (12:12) Jillian's trip to Glacier National Park with her son Micah before he passed away (20:33) Four components of planning a mini-retirement: time, career, finances, unexpected challenges (34:14) Time management: choosing 2-3 clear goals rather than trying to do everything (42:39) Career strategies: how to present your mini-retirement to employers (1:01:29) Financial planning: saving 6.5% of income for monthly breaks every other year (1:14:34) Handling unexpected challenges that arise during your time off (1:20:01) How mini-retirements reveal personal issues you've avoided through work (1:33:32) Jillian's recent family adventures with five children Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#599: Becky and her husband are about to semi-retire. But the four percent retirement withdrawal rule doesn’t make sense for them. Are there other financial frameworks they should explore? Kris is excited about a potential boost in local real estate values when the World Cup comes to town. Will this have any significant impacts on his property?  Peyton’s parents are pressuring her to buy a house, but she’s worried this will cripple her early retirement goals. Is she right to be concerned? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here (https://affordanything.com/voicemail) For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode599 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#598: Tax day is approaching, and if you're like most people, you might be overlooking deductions that could save you money. In our latest podcast episode, tax strategist Natalie Kolodij joins us to reveal common tax misconceptions and share strategies that could potentially lower your tax bill. "The tax code is 70,000 pages," Natalie explains. "There's so much. So I really like to have people focus on a handful of things to be mindful of." For W-2 employees who often have fewer tax advantages, Natalie highlights several overlooked deductions. If you live in a state without income tax (like Florida or Washington), you can deduct sales tax instead — especially on major purchases. Don't forget about personal property taxes on vehicles, boats or RVs either. Medical expenses can be deductible, but only amounts exceeding 7.5 percent of your adjusted gross income. Natalie suggests consolidating elective procedures into a single tax year to maximize this benefit. Charitable deductions offer surprising opportunities too. Miles driven while volunteering, expenses from fostering animals, and even home renovation materials donated to organizations like Habitat for Humanity can all qualify. Natalie also explains how "bunching" donations in alternate years can significantly increase tax savings compared to giving the same amount annually. The interview tackles major misconceptions about selling your primary residence. While many believe living in a home for two years makes all gains tax-free, Natalie clarifies that any "non-qualified use" periods (like when it was a rental property) can still be taxable. For small business owners and real estate investors, Natalie recommends tracking all business-related expenses — even seemingly minor ones like industry-related books or educational materials. She emphasizes the importance of proper record-keeping and having separate accounts for business expenses. As we navigate tax law changes following the recent election, Natalie's advice rings true: maintain flexibility in your tax planning and consider working with professionals who specialize in your specific situation. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Intro to tax day discussion (2:46) Common tax savings for W-2 employees (4:12) Standard vs itemized deductions explained (5:46) Often forgotten property tax deductions (6:58) Sales tax deductions for no-income-tax states (9:06) Medical expense deduction thresholds (12:53) Charitable giving strategies and overlooked deductions (17:51) Bunching donations in alternate years (22:20) Home sale tax exclusion misconceptions (30:44) Tax withholding changes and common mistakes (44:35) Bonus payment tax myths debunked (52:52) Finding the right tax professional (1:02:02) Small business and real estate investor tips (1:09:38) Best practices for tax record keeping (1:15:14) Preparing for potential tax code changes For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode598 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#597: A recession is coming, and it might be worse than most people expect. That's the sobering assessment from Bob Elliott, former Head of Ray Dalio's Investment Team at Bridgewater Associates, when he joins us on the podcast. Bob explains that several economic factors are converging to create challenging conditions. The combination of current trade policies, persistent inflation issues, and a Federal Reserve that's constrained in its response is creating significant economic headwinds. Tariffs play a central role in this economic outlook. While their inflationary impact remains debatable, their growth-negative effects are more certain. When imported goods become more expensive, consumers have less money to spend on other things. This reduces demand across the entire economy. Manufacturing and reshoring aren't simple solutions either. Bob points out that building new factories takes about five years, with payback periods stretching 30 years. This timeline explains why CEOs hesitate to make such investments, especially in an environment where policies change unpredictably. This uncertainty has driven CEO confidence to its lowest levels since the 2008 financial crisis, further complicating economic prospects. For individual investors, Bob offers surprisingly straightforward advice. Despite his sophisticated background managing billions, he follows a simple personal investment strategy: dollar-cost averaging and diversification. He even limits himself to reviewing his investments just once annually — typically the Wednesday before Thanksgiving. This disciplined approach prevents overtrading and removes emotion from investment decisions — principles that apply whether you're investing regular income or handling a windfall. Throughout our conversation, Bob emphasizes that the US economy fundamentally runs on consumer spending. When policies redirect money from discretionary spending toward necessities, the effects ripple throughout the entire system. Want to hear more of Bob's insights on recession probability, investment strategy, and economic policy? Listen to the full episode now. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Introducing Bob Elliott, former head of Ray Dalio's investment team at Bridgewater (2:56) Bob discusses high probability of recession due to growth-negative policies (7:00) Tariffs likely growth negative in short-term despite long-term manufacturing goals (14:20) Transition from global supply chains to parallel and redundant manufacturing systems (19:50) Four economic levers: tariffs, tax policy, monetary policy, and government spending (26:15) Stock market reacts to short-term expectations despite positive long-term outlook (34:15) Bond markets performing well as growth slows; potential recession duration of 1-1.5 years (45:40) Long-term productivity growth creates wealth despite short-term volatility (53:15) Dollar-cost averaging and diversification recommended for individual investors (59:15) Bob discusses founding GiveWell to identify highest-impact charitable giving (1:11:10) Bob explains Unlimited Funds, making hedge fund strategies accessible to everyday investors For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode597 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#596: Yesterday, the White House rolled out the biggest tariffs in a century, sending markets into their worst decline since the pandemic. While headlines focus on supply chains and inflation, there are important economic stories you're not hearing about. During the first half of this month's First Friday episode, we dig into what nobody's talking about. And in the second half, we grapple with the headlines. Student loan rules just changed again. The government added new limits to Public Service Loan Forgiveness. Right now, 9.2 million people — one in five borrowers — can't keep up with payments. Many folks don't even know payments started again after that four-and-a-half-year break. S&P just dropped a new report that backs what smart money already knows: index funds crush actively managed funds 90 percent of the time. Even with all those tech stocks dominating the market, you still come out ahead with simple indexing. You know who's gobbling up the mortgage market? Rocket Companies. They just bought both Redfin and Mr. Cooper. They'll handle one of every six mortgages in America. They've positioned themselves at every step of the homebuying journey — from when you search for homes on Redfin to financing and monthly payments for the next 30 years. The White House just made a surprising move with Bitcoin. They're setting up a Strategic Bitcoin Reserve to hold coins long-term. They're also creating a separate stockpile for crypto they seize in legal cases. Pretty clear signal that Bitcoin stands apart from other cryptocurrencies. In the second half, we dive into those significant new tariffs making headlines.  The S&P 500 dropped 4.8 percent on Thursday — we haven't seen a drop like that since the pandemic. The new rules put at least a 10 percent tariff on everything coming into the country. Then come the "reciprocal" rates: 20 percent for European goods, 27 percent for items from India, and a combined 65 percent for Chinese imports. We bring in Bob Elliott to make sense of this situation. His credentials are impressive — he spent 13 years at Bridgewater Associates (the world's largest hedge fund), served as head of Ray Dalio's investment team, and graduated magna cum laude from Harvard.  During the 2008 crisis, he directly advised the Treasury, Federal Reserve, and White House.  Bob offers a reality check about bringing back manufacturing jobs: you can't build factories overnight. These investments take years, and companies hesitate to make 30-year commitments when policies change every few months. Bob breaks down four economic forces all hitting at once: tariffs jacking up prices, government cutting spending, tax policies on hold, and the Fed moving like molasses. Put them together? Yikes. He doesn't sugarcoat it — the short-term outlook looks "pretty negative." For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode596 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#595: Eva is finally closing in on her financial independence goals, but she’s grappling with how to make a smooth transition from accumulation to decumulation. What should she consider? John has noticed a game-changing omission from recent discussions about traditional versus Roth IRAs. Is this as big of a deal as he thinks it is? An anonymous caller is excited to convert his primary residence into a rental property. But he’ll only make a profit if he first sells some equities to pay down the mortgage. Is this a good idea? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode595 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#594: Ever wonder if you could afford to travel for months at a time? According to Nomadic Matt, who's visited more than 100 countries over the last 19 years, you can see the world on just $75 a day. That's about $27,375 per year, less than many people's current cost of living. Matt Kepnes, better known as Nomadic Matt, joins us to challenge common assumptions about travel costs. He explains that long-term travel can actually be cheaper than staying home. When you're traveling, you shed many regular expenses that eat into your budget back home, like car payments, home insurance, and utility bills. The key is to "travel like you live," as Nomadic Matt puts it. This means using public transportation instead of taxis, shopping at local markets, and seeking out free activities — just like you might do in your hometown. It's not about staying at five-star resorts, but experiencing destinations authentically while keeping costs reasonable. Nomadic Matt also breaks down several travel myths. The old advice about booking flights on Tuesdays? Outdated in today's algorithmic pricing world. Using incognito mode to get better flight prices? No evidence supports this idea. He does confirm that booking round-trip flights often costs less than one-way tickets, even if you don't use the return portion. For those interested in credit card points, Nomadic Matt recommends choosing cards based on your specific travel goals rather than chasing the most popular options. Consider which airlines you use most and what perks you'll actually take advantage of. The pandemic has transformed travel in significant ways. While prices have increased and some budget travel services have disappeared, new opportunities have emerged — especially for remote workers who can now take advantage of digital nomad visas to live abroad while maintaining their income. Whether you're planning a two-week vacation or dreaming of becoming location-independent, Nomadic Matt's practical advice shows how international travel is more accessible than you might have thought. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Intro to Nomadic Matt and $75/day budget (1:00) Modern hostels aren't grungy anymore (3:00) Origins of the $75/day travel budget (5:00) "Travel like you live" approach saves money (8:50) Mix accommodations based on trip needs (9:40) Choose travel cards matching your specific goals (16:40) Use points before devaluation happens (20:00) Best booking times for flights (37:00) Social media's impact on global travel (42:00) Overcoming language barriers easily (48:30) Post-COVID travel costs and changes (56:20) Remote work visas for long-term travelers (1:02:40) Why travel costs less than staying home (1:05:50) How location independence evolved from unusual to mainstream For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode594 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#593: An anonymous caller is brooding over a mistake he made in 2023 when he decided to contribute to his Roth instead of a pre-tax account. How does he get over this? June is annoyed that she triggered short-term capital gains and wash sales when she sold assets in her taxable brokerage last year. How does she avoid these issues in the future? Zerai wants to add mid and small-cap exposure, but his 457 plan has a limited selection of mutual funds. What’s the proper way to select the best fund among the available options? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode593 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#592: Ever wonder what's happening in your brain right before you knock on your boss's door to ask for a raise? Dr. Joel Salinas, neurologist and brain health expert, joins us to explain the neurology of negotiation. When you avoid difficult conversations, your brain actually rewards you with a small dopamine hit. That temporary relief feels good, reinforcing the avoidance behavior. But Dr. Salinas explains this creates a problematic loop: the more you avoid conflict, the more uncomfortable it becomes when you face it. Breaking this cycle starts with a simple but powerful step: taking a breath. A long, slow exhale activates the more deliberative parts of your brain, helping you move beyond knee-jerk reactions. Dr. Salinas suggests focusing on what he calls the "Bigger Better Offer" — the meaningful reward that comes from pushing through discomfort. Thinking about what happens if you don't ask for that raise (struggling to pay bills, missing career advancement) can motivate you to overcome avoidance tendencies. Beyond workplace conflicts, we explore fascinating brain facts: Your brain constructs reality like "one great big hallucination" Neural pathways that fire together wire together Conflict isn't a sign of failure — it's actually necessary for authentic connection Want to boost your brain health? Dr. Salinas recommends regular exercise, brain-healthy foods like leafy greens and berries, quality sleep, supportive social connections, and challenging yourself with new skills. The conversation meanders through various aspects of brain function — from why humans are visual creatures to how trauma impacts neural pathways — all explained in accessible, engaging terms. Whether you're looking to have difficult conversations more effectively or simply curious about the remarkable three-pound organ controlling your reality, this episode offers practical insights into the science of your mind. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Intro (3:00) What happens in your brain when asking for a raise (6:30) How negativity bias shapes interactions with authority figures (10:41) The "Bigger Better Offer" technique for breaking behavioral loops (19:22) Why avoiding conflict creates reward pathways in the brain (29:12) Training your brain to tolerate disagreement (34:52) How salience and valence affect what we perceive as conflict (40:42) The role of internal conflict in decision-making (55:08) Understanding the structure and functions of different brain regions (1:00:53) Why imagination of possibility matters for breaking rumination cycles (1:06:45) How challenging our brain creates new neural pathways (1:11:42) Five key behaviors that improve long-term brain health (1:17:03) Brain plasticity and how it changes throughout our lifetime (1:22:51) Resources for learning more about conflict resilience For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode592 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#591: Imagine you're about to ask your boss for a raise. Your stomach tightens. You've rehearsed what to say, but doubt creeps in. Should you be more assertive? More understanding of company constraints? Bob Bordone, who has taught negotiation for 25 years including 21 years at Harvard Law School, joins us to explain why you don't have to choose between empathy and assertiveness. In fact, combining them is key to successful negotiations. "It might feel like a tension, but it's not an actual one," Bordone explains. "I can fully appreciate what you're feeling without ever giving anything up in a negotiation." Bordone breaks down his three-part preparation framework: Mirror work: Identify the different sides of yourself in a negotiation — the empathic side that understands company constraints, the assertive side that knows you deserve recognition, and perhaps an anxious side worried about finances. Chair work: Give each side a voice through role-playing exercises, literally sitting in different chairs to embody each perspective. Table work: Bring these voices into the actual negotiation in an authentic way that doesn't make the other person feel attacked. He also introduces fascinating concepts like "conflict recognition" — how quickly we perceive something as a conflict — and "conflict holding" — our comfort with leaving conflicts unresolved. These differences often cause relationship problems when we're unaware of them. "My best friend and I might debate over Flaming Hot Cheetos for 25 minutes. For me, with high conflict recognition, it's completely fun. I go home and sleep like a baby," Bordone says. "For someone with low conflict recognition, they might think, 'That was horrible. Did I hurt the relationship?'" When someone tries to shut down your request with policy ("that's just how we do things here"), Bordone recommends what he calls the "Wizard of Oz tactic" — asking a few more questions rather than immediately accepting defeat. The skills you develop asking for a raise transfer to other challenging conversations — from family inheritance discussions to political disagreements with colleagues. Bordone emphasizes that conflict isn't something to avoid but rather a normal part of relationships. The question isn't whether we'll have conflict, but how we handle it when it inevitably arrives. Resources Mentioned Book: Conflict Resilience Web: BobBordone.com Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Introduction to Bob Bordone (02:35) Contentious times vs 25 years ago (04:26) Negotiation vs facilitation vs conflict resolution (05:56) Key negotiator skills (08:35) Empathy meets assertiveness (11:22) Mirror work explained (15:58) Chair work technique (19:58) Table work strategies (24:10) Role-playing in preparation (31:44) Rights, power, interests framework (35:39) Conflict recognition vs conflict holding (42:22) Handling power imbalances (50:13) "Difficult people" reconsidered For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode591 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#590: In the left corner, we have Paul Merriman, the seasoned finance veteran weighing in at 183 pounds. In the right corner, Dr. Karsten Jeske, the scrappy newcomer at 208 pounds. The bell rings, and the small cap value debate begins. This episode features a financial boxing match between two investment heavyweights with dramatically different perspectives. Paul Merriman champions diversification through the efficient frontier, which means adding small cap value to your portfolio. Dr. Karsten Jeska has "thrown cold water" on this approach, favoring simpler strategies like "VTSAX and chill." The stakes are high — we're talking potentially millions of dollars in your retirement account over decades. Merriman argues that history shows clear evidence for small cap value's premium. From 2000 to 2009, small cap value outperformed the S&P 500 in all but one year, compounding at 10 percent while the S&P 500 returned negative 1 percent. He believes this pattern will continue, creating a powerful diversification effect when combined with broader market indexes. Jeska counters that small cap value's outperformance is mostly "front-loaded" in history, happening before anyone knew about it. Since 2006, small cap value has underperformed. He argues that once an advantage becomes widely known, it disappears in an efficient market. Adding small cap value might even be "di-worsification" — increasing complexity without improving returns. The debate expands beyond small cap value to touch on: Active vs. passive investing strategies Market timing vs. buy-and-hold approaches Simplicity vs. complexity in portfolio construction The role of faith vs. evidence in investment decisions While both experts disagree about small cap value's future, they agree on fundamentals: invest early, stay invested for the long term, and understand that no one can predict markets with certainty. What starts as a technical debate evolves into a philosophical discussion about evidence, probability, and the limits of our knowledge — all with millions of retirement dollars hanging in the balance. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Debate intro: small cap value vs index funds (4:01) Merriman: small cap value offers premium returns (9:40) Jeske: small cap value underperformed since 2006 (18:20) Historical performance data significance (25:15) Stakes: difference of millions over time (33:08) Diversification vs added volatility debate (41:45) Risk-adjusted returns comparison (49:08) Questioning true diversification benefits (57:40) Value traps and actively managed funds (1:05:08) Technology stocks vs value investments (1:13:45) Data selection bias in studies (1:19:40) Faith vs science in investment decisions (1:29:20) Personal risk tolerance considerations (1:36:08) Closing arguments on investment strategies (1:42:08) Paula declares the debate a draw For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode590 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#589: Kimmy is worried that her mom’s retirement portfolio is invested too conservatively. Is she right to advise her to take on more risk? Peyton has heard the financial advice about staying away from Whole Life Insurance as an investment, but what about as a savings account for children? Is there good a use case for this? Jeff and his wife are in a great financial position, but they fear that their retirement savings are too heavily apportioned in traditional IRAs. Will they run into tax problems in the future?  Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode589 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#588: Jobs are growing, interest rates are holding, and your student loan options just hit pause. Welcome to this month's economic rollercoaster. The economy is sending mixed messages this month. We added 151,000 new jobs in February, slightly better than January's 143,000. But unemployment ticked up to 4.1 percent. Health care is booming (52,000 new jobs). Restaurants and bars? They're hurting (lost 27,500 jobs). Federal government shed 10,000 positions while state and local governments added 21,000. The Fed isn't making any sudden moves. They'll likely hold interest rates steady at 4.25 - 4.5 percent when they meet March 18-19. Fed Chair Powell made this clear: "We do not need to be in a hurry and are well-positioned to wait for greater clarity." Meanwhile, Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent is working a different angle. He's targeting 10-year Treasury yields instead of pressuring the Fed on short-term rates. His strategy? Use fiscal and regulatory reforms to convince markets that inflation will be controlled long-term. Energy costs are a key part of his plan. Bessent believes lowering gas and heating oil prices does double duty: saves consumers money and boosts economic confidence. This matters because consumer spending is 70 percent of our economy. Speaking of confidence – it's plummeting. February saw the largest monthly decline in consumer sentiment since August 2021. People across all age groups and income levels are increasingly pessimistic. They expect inflation to hit 6 percent in the coming year (significantly higher than current rates). Got federal student loans? Applications for income-driven repayment plans are temporarily on hold. This affects all plans, even the older ones not being challenged in court. The pause came after a federal appeals court expanded a suspension of the SAVE plan. About 8 million borrowers had enrolled in this program, with more than 400,000 having their debts erased. If you're working toward Public Service Loan Forgiveness, this is particularly important since income-driven plans are a key requirement. In crypto news, bipartisan legislation for stablecoins is moving forward. The Senate has the GENIUS Act while the House has the STABLE Act (yes, that spells "stable genius"). These bills would establish clear rules about who can create stablecoins and require them to be fully backed by high-quality assets like U.S. dollars or Treasury bills. They would also officially classify stablecoins as payment instruments rather than securities – a significant regulatory distinction. The housing market? It varies dramatically by location. In DC, some zip codes are seeing prices climb rapidly while others face steep declines. The lesson: real estate is hyper-local. Success comes from becoming an expert in just a couple of specific zip codes rather than trying to understand entire metropolitan markets. As Fed Chair Powell wisely put it, the key is "separating the signal from the noise as the outlook evolves." That's solid advice for navigating our current economic landscape. Episode Mentioned: Afford Anything Episode 564, The Real Story Behind Those Economic Tariffs https://affordanything.com/564-the-real-story-behind-these-new-tariffs/ Timestamps: Note: The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) March's Economic Update (01:18) February Jobs Report (04:18) The Fed is to meet on March 18-19 about interest rates (08:14) Consumer Confidence Survey (10:33) Stock Market Performance (14:14) Deep Seek Chat Bot (17:28) New CFTC Chairperson is crypto friendly (20:34) Home Market in the D.C area changing (25:24) Income Driven Repayment Plan applications temporarily on hold (27:41) Stablecoins (30:58) Certain borrowers may be excluded from student loan forgiveness (31:54) Fed Chair Jerome Powell says the Fed is "awaiting greater clarity" Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#587: Debi is stressed about saving a down payment to buy a house in her high-cost-of-living area. Should she cash out her brokerage account to speed up the process? Lucas and his wife are high earners, but they’re tired and ready for a change. What strategies can they use to maximize their investments and confidently step away from their jobs? Grant is thrown off by recent discussions about the efficient frontier. It sounds a lot like market timing to base an investment strategy on an arbitrary set of historical dates. What’s he missing? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode587 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#586: If you are a complete beginner at finances, or if you know someone who is, this episode is for you. The biggest hurdle for beginners? Money seems complex and intimidating. But Scott Yamamura, author of Financial Epiphany, explains personal finance doesn't have to be complicated. He breaks compound interest into three easy-to-grasp frameworks: Money as a Multiplying Ability: Just like athletes have peak physical abilities in their 20s, your money has its greatest multiplying power when you're young. At age 22, every dollar invested can multiply 16 times by retirement (assuming a 40-year career and 7.2 percent returns). The Doubling Framework: Money can double approximately every 10 years with average market returns. This explains why a dollar invested at 22 becomes $2 by 32, $4 by 42, $8 by 52, and $16 by 62. The Halving Concept: With each decade that passes, your money's multiplying power gets cut in half. This is the inverse of the above idea. Scott shares how these simple frameworks helped him front-load his son's college savings. "We can stop now because it's going to double," he said. For beginners struggling with analysis paralysis, Scott offers a Rubik's Cube analogy: You don't need to understand all 43 quintillion possible combinations to solve it — you just need one simple method to get started. Similarly, you don't need to master every financial concept to begin investing. The most important step is just to get started. You can learn the complexities later, but starting early gives your money more time to grow. Scott also emphasizes finding your "why" — a purpose bigger than just accumulating wealth. He shares a moving story about a man named Ernie who funded his mission trip to Sierra Leone, showing how money can be used to make a profound difference in people's lives. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) Introduction  (1:16) Scott discusses reframing compound interest as "money multiplying ability" (3:47) Money multiplying power works like athletic ability - strongest when young (7:02) Scott addresses challenges of saving when young and broke (10:29) Explanation of the Rule of 72 for doubling money (13:43) Every dollar invested at 22 multiplies 16x by retirement (17:08) What to do if you're starting late with retirement savings (20:44) Three core ideas of compound interest (23:19) Using the concept of "halving" to create urgency to invest (30:30) Finding your "why" to overcome financial temptations (33:07) Scott shares personal story about Sierra Leone mission trip (36:46) The joy of spontaneous giving as motivation for building wealth (40:53) Balancing retirement savings with paying off debt (43:38) Simplifying finance through the Rubik's Cube analogy (52:50) Paula's wrap-up with actionable investing advice for beginners For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode586 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#585: Michael rebalances his portfolio every year. But he’s worried that triggering capital gains taxes on his brokerage account will cancel out the benefits of reallocation. Is there a better approach? Sam has an opportunity to switch jobs, but she’s confused about how an Employee Stock Ownership Plan stacks against her current employer’s 401(k). Is she getting a good offer? Carlos is excited about early retirement in Brazil, but he’s worried about the tax implications for his U.S.-based retirement accounts. How should he prepare for this move? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode585 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#584: Think about how you spend an average day. Would the 10-year-old version of yourself be impressed? What about the 90-year-old version? These two powerful questions frame our conversation with Sahil Bloom, founder and managing partner of an early-stage venture fund with investments in over 60 startups and author of The Curiosity Chronicle, a newsletter that reaches more than a million readers worldwide. Sahil shares the story of his own wake-up call. While living in California and earning massive money as a venture inventor, he had a drink with an old friend who asked how often he saw his parents. When Sahil answered "about once a year," his friend asked how old they were. Learning they were in their mid-60s, his friend calculated: "So you're going to see your parents 15 more times before they die," assuming they'd live to about 80. That gut-punch realization led to massive change. Within 45 days, Sahil had left his job, sold his house, and moved across the country to be closer to family. This shift represents the core of Sahil's philosophy about the five types of wealth: 1. Time wealth: Control over your calendar and priorities 2. Social wealth: Deep, meaningful connections with others 3. Mental wealth: Curiosity, purpose, and personal growth 4. Physical wealth: Health and vitality 5. Financial wealth: Traditional money and assets Most of us focus exclusively on financial wealth because it's easily measurable. But Sahil argues that true wealth encompasses all five domains, and we should intentionally invest in each one. Sahil shares practical exercises for building each type of wealth: - For time wealth, create an "energy calendar" by tracking which activities energize versus drain you - For social wealth, map your relationships based on how healthy and frequent they are - For purpose, ask yourself what your world (family, community, etc.) needs from you - For physical wealth, focus on movement, nutrition, and recovery through simple practices - For financial wealth, clearly define what "enough" looks like for you These five domains aren't meant to be balanced perfectly every day. Instead, Sahil suggests thinking in seasons — some periods might emphasize financial growth while others prioritize family time. Sahil also discusses powerful concepts like goals versus anti-goals (what you're unwilling to sacrifice to reach your goals) and "Memento Mori" — the ancient Roman practice of remembering one's mortality to inspire present action. The conversation ends with a reminder that "your life has seasons" just like the weather — you don't expect to experience all four seasons in a single day, so don't expect perfect balance in every area of life simultaneously. For more from Sahil Bloom, find him on major social platforms or visit fivetypesofwealth.com. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. # Episode Timestamps (0:00) Would your 10-year-old self be impressed with your life? (1:46) Sahil's wake-up call: seeing parents only 15 more times before they die (4:19) The Tail End: visualizing how few books and moments remain in life (6:56) Small changes that dramatically increase time with loved ones (13:26) The tension between ambition and presence; why "later" becomes "never" (17:42) Why we measure financial wealth but not other forms of wealth (19:47) The five types of wealth: financial, time, social, mental, physical (30:09) Creating an "energy calendar" to track what energizes vs drains you (38:09) Relationship mapping: evaluating connections by health and frequency (42:33) Goals vs anti-goals: what you're unwilling to sacrifice for success (51:17) Why your purpose doesn't need to be your work (54:46) The 30-day health challenge: movement, nutrition, recovery (57:05) Vonnegut and Heller on having "enough" vs wanting more Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#583: Contrary to recent discussions, Jesse has concluded that a traditional IRA is the smarter way to go for most people once marginal tax rates are factored in. Is he missing something?   An anonymous caller is four years away from early retirement but she’s unsure if her portfolio allocations are in the right place. How and when should she start converting equities to cash? Luz is confused about how to handle company stock options. Is there an ideal spread between the exercise price and the stock price? And, what should she do once the stocks are exercised? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode583 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#582: They had it all. Six thriving children. A 40-year marriage. A household income of $200,000. Then in her 60s, she discovered a shocking truth: he had gambled away their entire retirement savings in penny stocks.  She had no access to their financial accounts during the marriage. After divorcing, she was left with nearly nothing. Today, she relies on her adult kids for support. Harvard-trained family law attorney Aaron Thomas joins us for a Valentine's Day discussion about prenuptial agreements — not just as divorce insurance, but as a framework for building stronger marriages. Thomas is a three-time winner of Atlanta's Best Divorce Attorney and a leading expert in family law. He’s the founder of prenups.com and authored The Prenup Prescription. Thomas explains that every married couple already has a prenup by default: their state's laws. In 41 states, judges have broad discretion in dividing assets "equitably" — which might mean a 70-30 split rather than 50-50. The remaining nine states are community property states, where assets are typically split equally. But even in community property states, determining what qualifies as joint property can spark fierce debate. For example: if you entered marriage with $100,000 in a 401(k) and continued contributing during the marriage, how much belongs to you vs. the marriage? What about a home you owned before marriage, but your spouse helped pay the mortgage? To prevent financial surprises, Thomas recommends couples hold "annual shareholder meetings" to review finances together. He suggests creating three buckets — yours, mine and ours — with clear agreements about spending. For example, his prenup requires both spouses to approve joint account purchases over $500. Beyond asset division, prenups can include requirements like marriage counseling before filing for divorce, or mediation if custody disputes arise. While prenups can't determine child custody or support payments, they can establish frameworks for working through conflict. The biggest benefit, Thomas argues, isn't protecting yourself in case of divorce — it's creating clarity and communication during marriage. By having difficult conversations upfront about money, expectations and conflict resolution, couples build stronger foundations for lasting partnerships. Listen to this episode to hear our full conversation about how prenups can strengthen marriages, prevent costly court battles, and help couples align on money management from day one. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00) The hidden marriage contract (3:01) Legal definition of marriage and financial rights (12:42) Historical view: marriage as duty vs love (19:38) Prenups defined: financial rules for marriage (24:20) Annual money meetings between spouses (27:26) Why "everything is 50/50" is a myth (35:21) How separate property becomes marital property (39:26) Real examples: retirement accounts and homes (44:44) State prenup vs your own prenup (48:04) Using prenups for counseling and mediation (55:07) Pets in divorce: property not custody (57:30) Family loans and spending limits (1:01:57) Financial transparency prevents disasters (1:07:21) Community property vs equitable division (1:10:34) Why every couple needs money agreements (1:14:51) Postnups and no-nups explained Resources Mentioned: Home - Prenups | Website Prenups.com (@prenupguy) | Instagram Book Your 30-Minute Consultation Today - Afford Anything - Prenups | Website The Prenup Prescription | Book For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode582 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#581: Today's question is different. There's something special about it — and you'll understand why in a moment. An 84-year-old listener left us a voicemail about his struggle to break free from mortgage debt. He and his 83-year-old wife need to move from their two-story townhouse because they can’t climb the stairs any longer. They found a single-story ranch house that fits their needs perfectly — except for one detail: it carries a crushing $4,200 monthly mortgage payment. They do have one potential escape route from this debt: selling their Florida condo, a vacation retreat that they haven't visited in years due to mounting chronic health challenges. But Hurricanes Milton and Helene ravaged their building last year. The storms spared their unit but destroyed the lobby and submerged their car in floodwater. The devastation slashed $100,000 from their property's value overnight. Now they face an agonizing decision: Should they accept this massive loss and sell the condo to free themselves from debt? Or would selling now, after such a steep drop in value, mean locking in their losses? Joe and I have answered hundreds of questions from our listeners over the years. But this question is special. It comes from my Dad. __________________________ Here’s the transcript of my father’s full question: Hi Paula and Joe,  My name is Prahlad. I am 84 years old, and my wife is 83. We live in a two-storied townhouse in Atlanta and also own a two-bedroom condo on the beach as a second home in Clearwater, Florida.  Recently, we purchased a one-storied ranch home in Atlanta so that we don’t have to go up and down the staircase at this old age.  Our condo in Clearwater is on the 9th floor of the 14 storied building. We love the condo with views of the Gulf of Mexico and the Bay. However, we have not been able to visit it for a long time due to our underlying health conditions.  We purchased the condo for $400,000 in 2015 and it was estimated to have appreciated to $800,000 in 2022. Since then, the price was estimated to come down to $775,000 in the Spring 0f 2024.   As you know, this area was hit by two major hurricanes Helene and Milton in September and October last year. The lobby of the building was flooded with extensive damage and it is still under construction. The parking area under the roof was also flooded and our car was totaled. Fortunately, our condo did not suffer any damage.  There has not been any significant real estate buy and sell activities in this neighborhood since it was hit by the hurricanes last year. My real estate agent estimates that the current value of the condo is $700,000.  This building has been preparing for a major renovation of the plaza deck for the past few years, and we or the future owner anticipate to be assessed a large amount – maybe $30,000 – for the renovation.  We were hoping that we could sell the condo and pay off the mortgage for the ranch home we recently purchased in Atlanta, and be debt free.  What do you think – should we sell it now or wait until some later time – maybe until next year?  Your advice would be highly appreciated. Thank you both for what you do.   For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode581 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#580: "If you want to understand what's happening in the economy, look at bonds," begins today's episode, where we explore how the bond market acts as a crystal ball for economic trends. The bond market has been sending some clear signals lately. Interest rates remain elevated, with 10-year Treasury yields about 1 percent higher than their September 2024 low. After a challenging 2024 where bond returns flattened to just 1.18 percent, both the U.S. and U.K. are seeing historically high yields. We break down what's driving these changes and explain key concepts like term premium — the extra return investors demand for holding longer-term bonds. The Federal Reserve's recent moves are shaping this landscape. After cutting rates by 1 percentage point between September and December 2024, Fed officials are now signaling a more cautious approach, wanting to see further inflation decline before considering additional cuts. Then we explore why President William McKinley is suddenly relevant again. McKinley, whose term began in 1897, was known for his imperialist expansion and love of tariffs. His presidency came towards the end of what historians call "the long 19th century" — a period from the French Revolution in 1789 to the start of World War I in 1914. This era was marked by massive social upheaval, major technological advancement, the First Industrial Revolution, and huge migration into cities. It also included the California and Klondike Gold Rushes. The episode then turns to what some are calling the "Cold Rush" — the race to claim influence in the rapidly changing Arctic. With ice melting four times faster than global averages and the potential for ice-free Arctic days by 2030, nations are competing for new shipping routes and access to resources. We examine three emerging paths: the Northern Sea Route along Russia's coast, the North-West Passage along North America, and the Transpolar Sea Route across the North Pole. Finally, we dive into an overlooked story: the global tax war. In 2021, 136 countries agreed to establish a 15 percent minimum corporate tax rate to prevent profit-shifting to tax havens. While the U.S. already exceeds this minimum with its 21 percent domestic rate, implementation faces challenges due to different methodologies for calculating tax bases and recent political developments that could affect its future. Resources mentioned: https://www.federalreserve.gov/econres/notes/feds-notes/the-treasury-tantrum-of-2023-20240903.html https://www.pimco.com/us/en/insights/will-the-true-treasury-term-premium-please-stand-up https://www.bls.gov/news.release/pdf/empsit.pdf https://youtu.be/gQqcKepuQdA?feature=shared https://www.morningstar.com/bonds/how-largest-bond-funds-did-2024 https://www.npr.org/2025/02/05/1229167003/mckinley-trump-tin-tariffs https://www.economist.com/finance-and-economics/2025/01/23/the-arctic-climate-changes-great-economic-opportunity https://www.clingendael.org/pub/2020/presence-before-power/4-greenland-what-is-china-doing-there-and-why/ https://www.clingendael.org/pub/2020/presence-before-power/ For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode580 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#579: Todd is in a real estate bind. He found out six days before closing on a new home that it wasn’t legally sellable. And renters are moving into his current home in two weeks. What should he do? Anonymous is excited about expanding her real estate portfolio. Should she sell her $2.5 million rental property in the Bay Area to do this, or can she keep it and leverage the equity instead? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these two questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode579 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#578: Fear blocks smart money moves. Ask Harvard Business Review advisor Dr. Margie Warrell, who guides Fortune 500 companies through strategic risk-taking. Her client roster includes NASA, Morgan Stanley, and Google. Her understanding of courage started at home. Her 13-year-old daughter landed an Australian TV role. She flew to LA for acting classes. There, she learned the hard truth: Success meant waiting tables for 20 years. The daughter's verdict was clear: "Mum, I don't want it enough." This reveals what Dr. Warrell calls the courage gap. It's the space between your current life and the life you could create through brave action. For investors, this gap appears daily. It's the distance between dreaming of financial independence and taking concrete steps toward building wealth. Drawing on her doctoral research and Fortune 500 consulting experience, Dr. Warrell outlines five critical steps to bridge this gap: 1. Focus on what you want, not what you fear.  Our brains have a negativity bias — we're twice as sensitive to potential losses as potential gains. This explains why market downturns feel more intense than upswings.  2. Rewrite your story.  The narratives we tell ourselves shape our actions. Perhaps you see yourself as "too risk-averse" to start a business or "not smart enough" to understand investing. Reframe these stories so you can take smart financial risks. 3. Embody courage physically.  Fear lives in our bodies — whether it's anxiety about making your first investment or launching a side business. Try simple practices like deep breathing when facing big financial decisions. 4. Step into discomfort.  Growth and comfort can't coexist. Every successful investor and entrepreneur started as a beginner. Financial literacy and business acumen develops through consistent practice. 5. Find the treasure when you trip.  Market corrections, failed business ventures, and investment mistakes are learning opportunities.  Dr. Warrell emphasizes that courage isn't about waiting until you feel confident — it's about acting despite your fears.  This applies whether you're making your first stock purchase, buying your first rental property, or quitting your job to start a business. The takeaway: While you can't control market conditions or business outcomes, you can control your response to financial fears.  Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate. (0:00) Introduction (3:54) Fear's impact on financial decisions (6:13) Case study: Risk-reward in property investment decisions (10:28) Psychology of wealth decisions (14:21) How negativity bias affects investment choices (18:09) Five steps to bolder money moves (21:23) Navigating market uncertainty (26:52) Physical techniques for managing investment anxiety (31:28) Real example: Leading through market volatility (37:42) Finding clarity in financial goals (43:34) Why comfort zones limit wealth creation (47:59) Small steps toward investment confidence (53:11) Learning from market setbacks (58:38) Balanced approach to investment failures (1:02:51) Building long-term wealth resilience Resources Mentioned in the Episode: Website: Dr. Margie Warren Book: The Courage Gap Connect with Dr. Warrell on LinkedIn: Dr. Margie Warrell Follow Dr. Warrell on Instagram: Dr. Margie Warrell Interview with David Novak: Episode 534 For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode578 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#577: Kelsey is excited about investing along the efficient frontier, but it feels impossible with the lack of fund options in her employer-sponsored 401k. What’s the best way to deal with this problem? Molly discovered that her rollover from a 401k to a traditional IRA hadn’t been invested in mutual funds and was still in a money market fund. Manually calculating her net worth helped her identify this oversight, and she shares her experience with us. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle this in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode577 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#576: The world's greatest investors have a secret: they're weird.  When one young fund manager met Bill Miller for the first time, he refused to shake hands. Instead, he locked eyes and declared: "I'm going to beat you, man." William Green joins us to share what he's learned from decades of conversations with investing legends — from the hyper-competitive to the deeply philosophical.  These conversations reveal that success isn't just about strategy; it's about understanding yourself and playing to your strengths. The best investors are mavericks who think differently. They're willing to look strange, be lonely, and diverge from the crowd. Templeton demonstrated this during WWII. When Germany invaded France and markets crashed, he bought 104 stocks trading under $1 — including 37 bankrupt companies. His contrarian bet paid off 5x when markets recovered. But Green emphasizes this isn't just about getting rich.  His decades of interviews reveal deeper wisdom about building a good life: Great investors focus on what they can control. They can't predict markets, but they can manage their behavior and emotions. They embrace simplicity. Jack Bogle advocated owning low-cost index funds rather than chasing complex strategies. They understand odds and risk. Howard Marks asks "What's the consequence if I'm wrong?" before making decisions. They play to their strengths. Charlie Munger says if you're 5'3", don't try to be a pro basketball player. They live below their means. As investor Tom Gaynor notes, "If you're living within your means, you're already rich." Green shares a practical framework called HALT PS — don't make important decisions when Hungry, Angry, Lonely, Tired, in Pain, or Stressed. This applies beyond investing to daily life. The conversation explores how to build resilience before market crashes through healthy habits, self-awareness, and preparation. Green notes that many successful investors practice meditation and read widely across disciplines. Even legends make mistakes. Bill Miller saw his assets drop from $77 billion to $800 million during the 2008 crisis. But he rebounded by staying true to his principles and learning from failure. Green's key message? Focus less on getting rich and more on building an "anti-fragile" life aligned with your values and strengths.  The best investors aren't just good at making money — they're skilled at creating lives of meaning and purpose. Find more from William Green at williamgreenwrites.com or on his podcast Richer, Wiser, Happier, featured on the We Study Billionaires feed. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (01:00) Meeting Sir John Templeton in the Bahamas (04:02) Templeton's WWII stock strategy during market crash (12:00) Wisdom vs survivorship bias in investing stories (14:55) Why great investors recommend index funds (23:34) Prioritizing freedom over wealth maximization (39:27) Bogle's client-first philosophy (51:32) Living below means for market volatility (01:01:37) HALT PS conditions leading to poor choices (01:06:45) Using data for better decision making (01:11:13) Bogle's emphasis on simple investing (01:14:30) Danoff's "stocks follow earnings" strategy For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode576 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#575: Apar’s income has more than doubled after he started his own business. His advisor recommends Roth contributions but he’s skeptical due to his high income. Who’s right? Keith is frustrated by the conflicting advice he’s heard about Roth conversions. Is it better to do it while he’s young and earning a lower income, or should he wait until closer to retirement? Krish is fascinated by cryptocurrency and its impact on global investing. What opportunities should he capitalize on, and how? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#574: What would you do if someone in authority told you to do something that felt wrong? Most of us like to think we'd speak up, push back, stand our ground. But research tells a very different story. In fact, when Yale researchers conducted a famous experiment in the 1960s, they found that 65% of people would administer what they believed to be deadly electric shocks to another human being... simply because someone in a lab coat told them to. Today's guest has spent over 15 years studying why humans comply with authority - even when every fiber of our being is screaming that we shouldn't. And when it comes to our money, this tendency to comply with authority figures - from financial advisors to real estate agents to car salespeople - can cost us dearly. Dr. Sunita Sah began her career as a physician in the UK's National Health Service. During one particularly exhausting period as a junior doctor, she agreed to meet with a financial advisor who had contacted her at work. That meeting sparked questions that would shape the rest of her career: Why did she feel pressured to trust this advisor, even after learning he had a conflict of interest? Today, she's a tenured professor at Cornell University, where her groundbreaking research on compliance and influence has been featured in The New York Times and Scientific American. She's advised government agencies, served on the National Commission on Forensic Science, and helps leaders understand the psychology behind why we say "yes" when we really want to say "no." Whether you're meeting with a financial advisor, negotiating the price of a home, or discussing rates with a contractor, understanding the psychology of compliance could save you thousands of dollars - and help you make better financial decisions. Today's conversation isn't just about psychology - it's about protecting your wealth by learning when and how to say "no." Resources Mentioned in the Episode: - Website: sunitasah.com - Newsletter: Defiant by Design on Substack - Connect with Dr. Sah on LinkedIn - Follow Dr. Sah on Instagram About Dr. Sunita Sah Dr. Sunita Sah is a tenured professor at Cornell University specializing in organizational psychology. Her research focuses on how and why people comply with authority, even against their better judgment. A former physician in the UK's National Health Service, Dr. Sah brings a unique perspective to understanding human behavior and decision-making. Her work has been featured in leading publications including The New York Times and Scientific American, and she has served as a Commissioner on the National Commission on Forensic Science. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. 0:00 Intro 4:00 Most people follow authority against their own judgment 7:01 Dr. Sah meets a pushy financial advisor as a young doctor 9:55 Why conflict-of-interest disclosures backfire 12:16 "Insinuation anxiety" makes us cave under pressure 14:13 The "sales pitch effect" creates unwanted obligation 17:29 Growing up conditioned to comply as a South Asian daughter 20:34 Career paths: following passion vs family expectations 27:29 The Milgram experiments reveal our tendency to obey 35:28 Using "quiet defiance" to resist pressure 42:20 Why managers misunderstand employee silence 46:43 Five elements that separate consent from compliance 53:03 Building defiance through small daily practices 58:13 The power of the pause in decision-making 1:02:54 Five stages to recognize and act on resistance 1:18:22 How to develop your personal style of defiance For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode574 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#573: An anonymous caller has always put her large purchases on zero percent APR credit cards, but something’s been nagging at her. Is she walking on thin ice with this strategy? Von is confused why he keeps hearing that Roth accounts are better than traditional if they both lead to the same mathematical result. What’s he missing?  Molly and her husband are well on their way to financial independence, but they feel unfulfilled with their careers. Can they afford to plunge into student debt with a 50 percent pay cut? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode573 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#572: At age 7, Dr. Jordan Grumet lost his father. This early loss shaped his career path — he became a physician, following in his dad's footsteps. But by 2010, feeling burned out from internal medicine, he took an unexpected turn: he became a hospice doctor. In this episode, Dr. Grumet joins us to discuss what he's learned from thousands of conversations with people in their final days.  These discussions have revealed a pattern: people don't typically regret their bank balance on their deathbed. Instead, they regret not pursuing the activities and dreams that truly lit them up. Dr. Grumet explains the difference between what he calls "Big P Purpose" versus "little p purpose." Big P Purpose involves major life goals like becoming president or curing cancer. Little p purpose, by contrast, focuses on the process — finding activities you enjoy regardless of the outcome.  He shares the story of a young professional who loved competitive cycling. While working a demanding nonprofit job, this person started fixing bikes at races on weekends. This side project combined his skills and passion, eventually creating enough income for him to reduce his full-time hours. Dr. Grumet introduces three key concepts for building more purpose into your life: - Joy of Addition: Add activities that excite you, even if just for 15 minutes daily - Art of Subtraction: Remove activities that drain you - Substitution: When you can't add or subtract, swap one activity for another He emphasizes that money isn't the only tool for creating change. Youth, energy, relationships, skills and community can be equally valuable resources. A 22-year-old might lack funds but has the advantage of time and stamina that a 51-year-old doesn't possess. Dr. Grumet references the Harvard Adult Developmental Health Study, which found that strong relationships — not achievements or money — most strongly correlate with happiness. He suggests that pursuing activities you enjoy naturally leads to building these vital connections. The episode closes with a powerful story about his grandfather, who loved math and became an accountant in the 1950s.  This passion influenced Dr. Grumet's mother to become a CPA, which in turn helped young Jordan develop confidence in math, despite his reading challenges. Years later, this mathematical thinking helped him diagnose a rabbi's rare condition — proving how small actions can create ripple effects across generations. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. 0:00 Introduction to Dr. Grumet, hospice doctor discussing end-of-life insights 1:06 Transition from medicine to hospice as side hustle 2:21 Hospice shifts from medical to emotional care 4:12 Palliative care vs hospice care explained 5:05 Age range of hospice patients 6:55 Life priorities and deathbed regrets 13:46 Harvard Adult Developmental Health Study on happiness 20:00 Purpose, happiness and flow states 26:35 Joy of Addition and Art of Subtraction explained 33:30 Using youth when lacking money 41:18 Calendar evaluation strategies 48:45 Managing family disappointment 56:08 Regrets as purpose anchors 1:03:26 Common end-of-life regrets 1:09:06 Small actions, big legacy For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode572 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#571: An anonymous caller’s crypto investments have recently skyrocketed to 17 percent of her investment portfolio. Given the volatility of this asset, should she rebalance it or go all in?  Jocelyn wants to buy a house in three years but she’s reluctant to keep her sizable down payment in cash. What if she splits the difference and invests half the money instead? Allison feels antsy holding $1 million in cash with falling interest rates on the horizon. How does she optimize this money while keeping it liquid enough to buy a house on an uncertain timeline?  Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode571 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Grab your free copy of the 52-week guide to micro-improvements at https://affordanything.com/financialgoals _______ In 2012, the British cycling team pulled off what seemed impossible. After 76 years of losses, they won the Tour de France, took second place, and grabbed 8 Olympic gold medals. Their secret? Tiny improvements that added up to massive change. That's the philosophy behind "One Tweak a Week," a year-long financial roadmap broken into 52 small, manageable steps. Each tweak takes less than an hour — many just minutes — but compound into significant financial progress over time. The plan breaks down into four quarters. Quarter 1 lays the groundwork with foundational habits like writing a financial motivation statement, calculating net worth, and choosing key metrics to track. It's about getting clear on where you stand and where you're headed. Quarter 2 shifts focus to optimizing your money. You'll track prices, adjust thermostat settings to cut energy costs, create a "fun fund" for guilt-free spending, and develop strategies for charitable giving. This quarter also tackles professional development and emergency medical expense planning. In Quarter 3, the focus turns to systematic improvements — maintaining proper tire pressure to save on fuel, capturing work-from-home savings, planning for seasonal expenses, and building a buffer for unexpected price increases. Quarter 4 wraps up with fine-tuning your system. You'll evaluate housing options, manage variable food costs, set micro-saving challenges, and create strategies for handling market uncertainty. The approach mirrors what British cycling performance director Dave Brailsford calls "the 1 percent margin for improvement." He transformed the team by focusing on tiny details — everything from athlete hand-washing techniques to bringing specific mattresses to hotels for better sleep. Even painting the maintenance floor white to better spot problematic dust on bike gears. Like Brailsford's approach, these financial tweaks might seem small on their own. But together, they create a comprehensive system for building lasting wealth.  The guide is available at affordanything.com/financialgoals. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#569: Let’s take a look back on the biggest financial and economic stories of 2024 - and a look ahead to 2025! The Fed GDP The Bull Market The Deficit Inflation Bitcoin Basel III Endgame and Scientific Breakthroughs References and Resources: Michael Kitces interview https://AffordAnything.com/episode525 One Tweak a Week: https://AffordAnything.com/financialgoals For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode569 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Marie Curie won the Nobel Prize in Physics in 1903 and the Nobel Prize in Chemistry in 1911. She’s famous for her work in radioactivity. Lin-Manual Miranda is a songwriter, producer and director who won the Pulitzer Prize in Drama in 2016, as well as several Tony awards. What do they have in common? They lived a century apart. They innovated in disparate fields. But they shared a similar productivity practice. Both achieved greatness by embracing the practice of slow productivity, says Georgetown computer science professor Cal Newport. Slow productivity is a three-part practice, Newport explains: (1) do fewer things; (2) work at a natural pace; (3) obsess over quality. We’re used to thinking of productivity as doing more in a short amount of time. This flips that idea on its head, focusing on doing less, but excelling. Slow productivity is the practice of doing fewer tasks better. In this episode, Newport explains how the practice of slow productivity diverges from the normal ways that people in modern society tend to work. Life can be stressful. Your to-do list might feel never-ending. This episode can help you focus on the few things that matter most. It can help you feel less stressed, less busy, and yet — paradoxically — more productive, at the same time. We're sharing this as part of GREATEST HITS WEEK, a 5-day series in which we're sharing 5 episodes, across 5 days, that originally aired at the start of 2024 (January through March). You may have missed it then; enjoy it now. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Do you ever wonder what happens behind closed doors on Wall Street? Vivian Tu, also known as Your Rich BFF, is here to spill the tea. Vivian grew up in a modest immigrant family. After college, she found herself working insane hours on Wall Street after college. While working on Wall Street, Vivian saw some weird things. Once, a coworker stumbled hungover into the office after a trip to Atlantic City, carrying a duffel bag with thousands of dollars in cash inside. Vivian realized that there’s a group of high-income and high-net-worth people who handle money in drastically different ways than she learned in her frugal upbringing. She learned about investing, taxes, legal loopholes. She discovered new ways of thinking about money. She shares these insights — gleaned from her Wall Street days — in today’s podcast episode. We're sharing this as part of GREATEST HITS WEEK, a 5-day series in which we're sharing 5 episodes, across 5 days, that originally aired at the start of 2024 (January through March). You may have missed it then; enjoy it now. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

If you’ve ever thought: “I’d love a business BUT …“I don’t have TIME.” “I don’t have MONEY.” “I don’t have IDEAS.” “I have TOO MANY ideas and I don’t know where to start.” “I’m not technical.” “I’m not creative or artistic.” “I’m not good at sales.” You’re not alone. Countless people don’t start businesses or side hustles for these reasons. And they’re losing thousands — perhaps millions — in opportunity cost. How much could you make if you started a side hustle that eventually scaled into a business? Possibly millions. Today’s guest, Noah Kagan, is living proof. Noah was employee #30 at Facebook. His stock options, if fully vested, would be worth over $1 billion today. (If you want to do the math — his stock options came to 0.1 percent of the company, which has a current market cap of $1 trillion.) But Noah was fired just a couple months before his stock options vested. So rather than getting a billion-dollar payout, he got nothing. He sank into a deep depression, eventually recovering with the help of a therapist who counseled him on how to reframe the experience. Then he rolled up his sleeves and got to work. He became a serial entrepreneur, building multiple businesses. His most successful venture now makes $80 million in gross revenue, and his personal take-home is $3.3 million per year (which comes from a $200,000 annual salary and $3.1 million profit distribution.) His net worth is $36 million. Not a billion, but still not too shabby. Noah recently wrote a book called “Million Dollar Weekend: The Surprisingly Simple Way to Launch a 7-Figure Business in 48 Hours.” He sits down with us (in person!) to share: — how to find business ideas — how to overcome objections and rejections — how to scale By the end of the episode, the common objections that you often hear — like “I don’t have time/money/ideas” — will be quashed. Please enjoy! We're sharing this as part of GREATEST HITS WEEK, a 5-day series in which we're sharing 5 episodes, across 5 days, that originally aired at the start of 2024 (January through March). You may have missed it then; enjoy it now. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Great communication will get you a raise. It’ll get you promoted. You’ll land the corner office. You’ll make friends and be the life of the party. You’ll land business deals and form lucrative partnerships. Supercommunication is a superpower. But how do we build it? Sometimes, you might walk away from a conversation with the joy of having made a cool new friend. Or you snagged a critical piece of information that you realllllly needed. Or you successfully negotiated an extra $5,000 off your car. On the flip side, sometimes you’ll walk away from a conversation, scratching your head and wondering … “What just happened?” If either of these situations have happened to you, Charles Duhigg will help you understand WHY. Duhigg is a Pultizer Prize winning reporter. He holds an undergrad degree from Yale and an MBA from Harvard. He wrote for the LA Times and New York Times, before landing at The New Yorker. His first two books, The Power of Habit and Smarter, Faster, Better, have sold more than 5 million copies. Recently, he came out with a new book called Supercommunicators. He chats with us today to discuss the power of communication. Duhigg shares why communication is a critical component to happiness and success in every part of life. He discusses the different styles of conversations that people can have, which lead to either connection or disconnection. He also shares critical tips to help us all become supercommunicators and live richer lives. Enjoy! Resources Mentioned: Supercommunicators: How to Unlock the Secret Language of Connection, by Charles Duhigg | Book The Power of Habit, by Charles Duhigg | Book Smarter Faster Better, by Charles Duhigg | Book We're sharing this as part of GREATEST HITS WEEK, a 5-day series in which we're sharing 5 episodes, across 5 days, that originally aired at the start of 2024 (January through March). You may have missed it then; enjoy it now. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Ever made a flippant, seemingly minor decision that radically changed the course of your life?Morgan Housel has experienced this. At age 17, he made a quick decision that ended up saving his life. Sadly, two of his friends were less fortunate. He shares that story in today’s podcast episode, and sheds light on the lessons he’s learned from it. Housel says that his lifesaving choice — and many of our other important decisions — are snap verdicts, ones that we don’t spend much time thinking about. If pivotal moments are decided in a flash, how do we navigate risk? How do we evaluate our options? Housel says this comes understanding concepts that remain constant, consistent, and universal. We need to accept that humans aren’t rational. We must appreciate the reasons why the best answer doesn’t always win. We ought to remember that we overlook many good things happening around us. These constants will most likely impact our futures. Housel was named by MarketWatch as one of the 50 most influential people in the market. He is the New York Times bestselling author of The Psychology of Money. He joins us to discuss the ideas in his book, "Same As Ever". We're sharing this as part of GREATEST HITS WEEK, a 5-day series in which we're sharing 5 episodes, across 5 days, that originally aired at the start of 2024 (January through March). You may have missed it then; enjoy it now. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#568: Jason is confused by the recent discussions about the efficient frontier and Paul Merriman’s four-sector strategy. It seems a lot like another form of stock-picking. What’s the difference? Michelle straddles the Roth income threshold and is frustrated that she never knows if she’ll qualify for a Roth contribution until tax season. Is her current savings plan too complicated? Evan has $100 to spend on personal finance books for his high school’s library. What books would Paula and Joe put on this limited shelf space? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it here. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode568 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#567: What happens when an astronaut goes blind during a spacewalk? For Chris Hadfield, this wasn't a hypothetical scenario. While working outside the International Space Station, cleaning solution from his helmet visor spread into both eyes, leaving him completely blind in the vacuum of space. His response? Stay calm and methodically evaluate options. He could call Houston. He could have a crew member rescue him. He could try to cry to flush out his eyes - though that's tricky in zero gravity. This story opens our conversation with Polina Marinova Pompliano, former Fortune Magazine reporter and author of the new book "Hidden Genius." Through her interviews with high-performers across fields — from astronauts to investors to extreme athletes — she uncovers patterns in how people handle uncertainty and build resilience. Take trust, for example. Reid Hoffman's formula is simple: Trust = Consistency + Time. It's not enough to show up sporadically when it's convenient. Trust builds through meeting deadlines, following through on commitments, and maintaining clear communication — even during challenges. Reliable consistency compounds over time, much like interest in an investment account. Or consider Charlie Munger's approach to beliefs. Rather than defending positions "to the death," he argues you should only claim to believe something if you can argue the opposition's viewpoint better than they can. This forces you to genuinely understand different perspectives rather than just reflexively disagreeing. The conversation explores how people navigate major setbacks, from Conrad Anker surviving an avalanche that killed his climbing partners to Polina's own experience of quitting Fortune magazine right before COVID hit. A key theme emerges: resilience isn't about avoiding difficulty, but about training yourself to handle it through small daily practices. Former Navy SEAL David Goggins calls this "callusing the mind." By deliberately doing one uncomfortable thing each day - whether that's running in the rain or having a difficult conversation - you build your capacity to handle larger challenges. The goal isn't to become superhuman, but to expand your comfort zone step by step. Other topics include: - How immigrant experiences shape risk perception - The shift from institutional to individual trust in media - Reframing "failure" as redirection - Building competence as an antidote to fear - Finding signal in the noise of information overload Enjoy the conversation! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode567 Resources: James Clear Episode 156: https://affordanything.com/156-how-to-build-incredible-habits-with-james-clear/ Annie Duke Episode 281: https://affordanything.com/281-the-art-of-decision-making-with-annie-duke/ Annie Duke Episode 424: https://affordanything.com/424-the-power-of-knowing-when-to-walk-away-with-annie-duke/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#566: Jackie is sold on Paul Merriman’s “Four Funds” approach, but she’s overwhelmed by the logistics of diversifying her single fund portfolio.. What are the best practices to redistribute her investments, handle taxes, and manage rebalancing? Heidi’s mother recently passed and she’s struggling to decide between distribution options, their tax implications, and investment options for the annuity she inherited.  An anonymous caller and her husband want to buy a second home, pay for their children’s college, buy a car in cash, travel well, and save $3 to $4 million for retirement. How do they prioritize and manage their competing goals? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#565: When Codie Sanchez worked in finance, she wasn't planning to buy a laundromat. But facing 60-70 hour workweeks and realizing she didn't want her boss's job, she started looking for an exit strategy. Instead of buying a fancy car during her "midlife crisis," she purchased that first laundromat - a decision that would lead her to acquire multiple laundromats, car washes, and other local businesses. Codie joins us to break down how regular people can buy and run profitable local businesses, even without previous ownership experience. These "Main Street" businesses - think laundromats, car washes, landscaping companies, and other local services - often generate steady cash flow without requiring complex technology or massive scale. She shares eye-opening stats about business ownership in America: while 80 percent of Americans owned a business in the 1800s, today that number has dropped to just 6 percent. Meanwhile, private equity firms have increased their ownership of small businesses from 4 percent in 2000 to 20 percent by 2020. But there's good news for aspiring business owners. Codie breaks down 21 different ways to finance a business acquisition, from seller financing to equipment loans. She explains that 60 percent of businesses sell with some form of seller financing, making ownership more accessible than many realize. Want to avoid common pitfalls? Codie introduces her RICH framework: - Research: Define what type of business fits your goals and skills - Invest: Get skin in the game, but never risk bankruptcy - Command: Use systems and metrics to avoid accidentally buying yourself a job - Harness: Build toward bigger goals if desired She emphasizes starting small — master one business before attempting to build an empire. A successful acquisition requires understanding the "roadmap to making money" - the 5-7 key steps that drive profit in any business. The numbers tell an encouraging story: while 90 percent of startups fail within 10 years, small business acquisitions have a 75-95 percent success rate. Codie attributes this to buying proven business models rather than starting from scratch. Perhaps most importantly, she challenges the notion that "boring" businesses can't generate serious wealth. From a roofing company founder becoming one of the world's wealthiest women to a garbage collection entrepreneur building a billion-dollar enterprise, Main Street businesses have created numerous millionaires and billionaires. Want to learn more? Check out Main Street Millionaire. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode565 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#564: Our economy just gave us two big surprises that shape how we'll do business and invest in 2025. Our job market is going through major changes. Sure, we added 227,000 jobs - way more than anyone expected. Healthcare and hospitality are booming. But here's what you need to watch: our unemployment rate just climbed to 4.2%. When you look at how many people are joining or leaving the workforce, you'll spot some interesting signals about where we're headed. You've probably heard about these new trade proposals making waves. They're targeting our biggest trading partners - Mexico, Canada, and China. Let's talk about what tariffs really mean for your wallet. Some industries win, others lose. Your grocery bill? That might change. Your job prospects? That depends on your industry. We'll help you connect these dots. This matters because you need to know how these shifts affect your money, your job, and your business decisions. Our markets are changing. Our policies are evolving. But when you understand what's happening, you can make smarter moves. Join us as we break down these economic changes into practical insights you can actually use. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode564 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#563: Bitcoin is hitting new all-time highs. Is this just another bull cycle, or are we witnessing a fundamental shift in how the world thinks about money? That's the question at the heart of our conversation with Tatiana Koffman, General Partner at Moonwalker Capital and author of "The Myth of Money." Koffman joins us to explain why Bitcoin might be considered "digital property" rather than just a currency. She breaks down how Bitcoin derives its value from mathematical scarcity – similar to how gold becomes harder to mine over time, Bitcoin becomes more difficult and expensive to create every four years through events called "halvings." The conversation moves through several key developments in cryptocurrency. We discuss the recent approval of Bitcoin ETFs and how traditional financial institutions like JPMorgan Chase (whose CEO Jamie Dimon once openly criticized crypto) are now embracing these products. Koffman shares insights about crypto adoption worldwide, from El Salvador's experiment with Bitcoin as legal tender to Dubai's emergence as a crypto hub. When discussing Africa's cryptocurrency landscape, Koffman explains how Nigeria's unstable banking system has driven crypto adoption, with many young people using decentralized exchanges to participate in global markets. She describes how some Nigerians have built significant wealth starting from nothing, using "airdrops" (free tokens given to early adopters) to begin trading. The interview includes a debate about inflation rates and economic data reporting, with Koffman expressing skepticism about official figures, while I push back on claims made without supporting evidence. Koffman also explains different categories of crypto investments, distinguishing between Bitcoin as a potential store of value and what she calls "meme coins" – speculative assets she compares to gambling. She provides context about stable coins, particularly USDC and Tether, and their role during the Silicon Valley Bank collapse. For those interested in investing in cryptocurrency, Koffman suggests starting with exposure to Bitcoin through regulated platforms like Coinbase or ETFs, while emphasizing the importance of proper security measures. She explains concepts like "cold wallets" and "seed phrases," comparing them to different levels of bank security. Looking ahead, Koffman discusses cryptocurrency's potential role in reducing dependence on the U.S. dollar, particularly in developing economies, while acknowledging the challenges of creating stable alternative currencies. Find Koffman's weekly newsletter at mythofmoney.com or follow her on Twitter and Instagram @TatianaKoffman For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode563 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#562: More than 90 percent of people who ask to get their credit card annual fee reduced are successful. Yet most people never ask.  Why? They assume the answer will be no. Matt Schultz, the author of “Ask Questions, Save Money, Make More,” joins us to explain the psychology and tactics behind successful negotiation.  The key insight: companies want to keep your business. Banks, employers, and service providers invest in long-term relationships because it's more profitable than constantly finding new customers.  This gives you more leverage than you might think. For credit cards, Schultz points out that calling the retention department directly (rather than general customer service) often leads to better results. He shares his own experience of getting his $600 annual fee cut in half just by making a yearly call. With mortgage negotiations, Schultz suggests getting quotes from 3-5 lenders on the same day, since rates change frequently. A quarter-point rate reduction on a $360,000 mortgage saves $20,000 over the life of the loan. The fees themselves can differ by $5,000 between lenders. When it comes to workplace negotiations, Schultz recommends keeping a weekly log of your accomplishments. Note both your regular duties and times you went above and beyond. This creates a strong foundation for salary discussions. The most effective negotiations frame requests as win-win scenarios. Instead of just asking for tuition reimbursement, explain how additional education will help you contribute more to the company. Rather than demanding a lower rent, offer to sign a longer lease that reduces the landlord's vacancy risk. Schultz emphasizes building relationships during negotiations. The person at the call center has likely dealt with angry customers all day. Being pleasant and making a human connection can lead to better outcomes. The interview also covers negotiating with family members about money, choosing when to negotiate versus pay full price (like at charity shops or with small businesses), and how to time requests effectively.  The common thread: success comes from understanding the other party's interests and finding ways to align them with your own. This episode will show you how to save hundreds — or thousands — in your regular spending, simply by asking.  Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (0:00 Intro: Most people fear asking for discounts/negotiations (1:37) Keep weekly notes of work accomplishments for better negotiations (3:38) Companies want long-term customers - use this as negotiating leverage (6:04) Credit card fee negotiations - 90% success rate when asking (8:36) How to negotiate mortgage rates and compare lender quotes (13:15) Open-ended questions get better results than yes/no questions (19:41) How to handle pushy mortgage reps who bash competitors (26:41) Tips for millennials who hate phone calls but need to negotiate (31:17) Framing tuition reimbursement as benefit to company (39:19) Building rapport during negotiations vs being aggressive (44:42) When to walk away from difficult negotiations (49:20) Negotiating with small businesses vs large corporations (54:53) Red flags in workplace negotiations (58:38) How companies signal if they value employee growth (1:06:38) Final thoughts on customer lifetime value and negotiating power For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode562 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#561: Joanne is confident that her short and long-term financial plans are set, but she’s not certain about the medium-term. What’s the proper way to allocate money for different time horizons? Jessie is intrigued by Paul Merriman’s simple portfolio recommendations but wonders about his lean away from growth stocks. Are value funds generally better for everyday investors? Nancy is worried she’ll miscalculate her financial independence number because her net worth includes pre and post-tax money, plus liquid and illiquid investments. What’s the right approach?  Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode561 Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. (00:00) Joe, did your clients severely miscalculate their own FIRE number? (03:14) Joanne (31:42) Jesse (47:00) Nancy P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#560: Bill Bengen, the former rocket scientist who discovered the "4 percent rule" of retirement planning, joins us at the Bogleheads conference in Minnesota. Bengen clarifies that calling it a "rule" is misleading since it doesn't fit everyone's situation. The 4 percent figure came from studying the worst-case scenario since 1926, when someone who retired in 1968 could only safely withdraw 4.2 percent annually. Out of 400+ retirees in his database, that was the only one who had such a low safe withdrawal rate — most could take out much more. Recent research has pushed the "safe" withdrawal rate closer to 5 percent. But Bengen identifies eight key factors that affect how much you can withdraw, including how long you'll be retired and whether you're drawing from taxable or tax-deferred accounts. For early retirees planning for 50-60 years, Bengen says the safe withdrawal rate asymptotically approaches 4.2 percent — meaning even with an infinite time horizon, it won't drop below that. He thinks the common advice to use 3 percent for early retirement is unnecessarily conservative. Bengen shares what he calls the "four free lunches" in retirement planning: 1. Using an equity glide path (reducing stocks at retirement, then increasing later) 2. Diversification across asset classes 3. Regular portfolio rebalancing 4. Slightly overweighting higher-returning assets like small-cap stocks When it comes to market drops versus inflation, Bengen has clear advice: Don't panic during bear markets — they typically recover. But if you hit extended high inflation early in retirement, it's time to "head for the bunkers" and cut expenses drastically. Beyond finance, Bengen shares his excitement about space exploration as a former rocket scientist who graduated from MIT just months before the moon landing. He hopes to live long enough to see humans reach Mars and believes space tourism helps people appreciate Earth's beauty and fragility. The interview ends with a light-hearted discussion about whether Pluto should still be considered a planet (Bengen still calls it one, out of habit) and speculation about future tourism to Saturn's moon Titan once the sun's expansion makes it warmer in a few hundred million years. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. 0:00 Paula introduces Bill Bengen, creator of the 4% withdrawal rule 2:19 Bengen explains how the 4% rule represents a worst-case scenario from 1968 10:14 Bengen warns against using a fixed percentage withdrawal method, as it could lead to dangerously low income in down markets 17:32 Discussion of the "smile" pattern in retirement spending - high at start, dips in middle, rises at end for medical costs 23:22 Bengen shares the four "free lunches" in retirement planning, including equity glide path and diversification 34:25 Conversation shifts to bonds and stocks no longer being inversely correlated in 2022 35:44 Deep dive into Black Swan events and how to prepare for unpredictable market crashes 42:14 Bengen advises when to panic (inflation) and when not to panic (bear markets) during retirement 49:20 Analysis of spending categories that rise faster than inflation, like healthcare and housing 51:27 Bengen discusses graduating MIT in 1969, just before the moon landing 51:56 Conversation turns to current space exploration and plans for Mars missions 53:39 Bengen speculates about future tourism to Saturn's moon Titan 54:17 Light-hearted debate about Pluto's planetary status Resource Mentioned https://affordanything.com/377-how-i-discovered-the-4-percent-retirement-rule-with-bill-bengen For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode560 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#559: An anonymous caller, whom we name “Samantha,” and her husband are financially strained and feeling torn. Shortly after purchasing two rental properties, their income dropped dramatically. Should they sell? Tina is a full-time environmentalist. She’s worried that her index funds don’t align with her values on sustainability. Is there a world where she can be a savvy investor and fight climate change? Another anonymous caller, whom we name “Sarah,” is excited and uncertain about her growing business. Should she hold steady or invest more resources into it? And how does she know if she’s making the right call? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode559 The Efficient Frontier: Join Joe for an exclusive live session all about the efficient frontier (aka the secret sauce of smarter investing). This 90 minute online event is Thursday November 21st at 8pm ET / 5pm Pacific. Head on over to http://stackingbenjamins.com/efficient to grab your spot. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#558: What happens when you spend three decades talking to retirement experts? You learn that most of what people think they know about retirement planning is oversimplified or wrong. Christine Benz, director of personal finance and retirement planning at Morningstar, joins us on the Afford Anything podcast to share what she's discovered after 31 years of interviewing experts across personal finance, tax planning, and Social Security. One key insight: The standard advice about withdrawing 4 percent of your portfolio annually in retirement misses the mark. Real-life spending isn't that simple. In your 60s, you might spend more on travel. By your 80s, healthcare costs often rise. Benz suggests creating separate "pots" of money for different purposes - like a travel fund you aim to deplete within your first decade of retirement. Want to protect against market crashes early in retirement? Benz recommends keeping 5-8 years of planned withdrawals in cash and high-quality bonds. This prevents having to sell stocks during downturns. We talk about why retirement doesn't need to be all-or-nothing. Instead of going from 40 hours to zero, Benz describes how many people benefit from a phased approach. This might mean keeping the parts of your job you enjoy while dropping the rest, or finding new ways to use your skills. The conversation shifts to housing choices. While many assume retirees move to Florida or Arizona, the data shows most stay put. Those who do move often end up near their oldest daughter. And while single-family homes tend to make people happier until around age 75, apartment dwellers report more satisfaction after that — largely due to increased social interaction. Benz shares her own retirement planning process. Despite being a retirement expert herself, she works with an hourly financial planner who tells her she'll likely struggle to spend as much as she could in retirement. It's a common problem — after decades of saving habits, many retirees find it psychologically difficult to spend their money. The interview wraps up with a discussion about relationships in retirement. Research shows that while older adults often have smaller social circles, these relationships tend to be deeper and more meaningful. They've pruned away the "good enough" friendships to focus on their closest connections. Benz's insights come from her new book "How to Retire" and her work at Morningstar, where she creates free model portfolios and hosts The Long View podcast. Beyond the financial aspects, she emphasizes that successful retirement planning involves thinking about purpose, relationships, and how you want to spend your days — not just your money. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. 0:00 What 30 years of retirement expert interviews reveal 1:34 Why spending in retirement is harder than saving for it 3:12 Beyond money: need purpose, not just leisure 4:00 The challenge: planning for an unknown time horizon 8:52 Should market fears delay your retirement? 13:42 How much cash and bonds to keep safe 15:49 When bonds don't protect against stock crashes 18:33 Phased retirement: keep what you love, drop what you don't 29:24 Take mini-retirements throughout your career 33:20 Spending shifts: from travel to healthcare costs 46:14 Why most retirees don't actually move 57:31 After 75, apartment living beats houses 1:00:42 Friendship patterns change: quality over quantity 1:04:58 Virtual vs real-life connections 1:06:25 Where to find more info For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode558 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#557: Imagine saving nearly your entire paycheck while your rental properties cover your bills. That's exactly where real estate investor Andrew finds himself — and yet he's at a crossroads.  At FinCon, a personal finance conference, former financial advisor Joe Saul-Sehy and I sit down with Andrew and another attendee who bring their money dilemmas live on stage. Andrew's question seems simple at first: should he sell his index funds to pay off his rental mortgages? But the real story runs deeper.  He feels called to entrepreneurship and wants to quit his corporate job to pursue it full-time. He could achieve minimal financial independence (lean-FIRE) if he pays off the properties, but that might limit his options. Next, Chris, a Gen X dad, opens up about his Gen Z kids' gloomy money outlook. His 22 and 24-year-old children, especially his daughter, believe their generation "will never retire." They see high inflation, expensive housing, and low wages as insurmountable obstacles. This sparks a deeper conversation about generational perspectives. We note that similar fears existed 15 years ago when millennials entered the workforce during the Great Recession. Joe shares how he helped his own kids develop healthier money mindsets by introducing them to financial voices they could relate to, like Broke Millennial author Erin Lowry. The discussion evolves into how today's young people actually have more opportunities than previous generations — they can work remotely, start online businesses with minimal capital, and create multiple income streams through platforms that didn't exist before. Chris's daughter, for instance, sometimes makes $35/hour driving for DoorDash during peak times. We wrap up by talking about the importance of focusing on what you can control and finding purpose beyond just retirement planning. As Andrew points out, it might be worse to spend the best years of your life doing work you don't care about than to face uncertainty in retirement. The key is taking action on the things within your control while building toward long-term security. Throughout the conversation, both guests share personal stories that illuminate their situations - from Andrew's experience at an oil refinery that pushed him toward entrepreneurship to Chris's daughter storing cash for taxes from her DoorDash earnings, showing she's more financially aware than she might think. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. 1:50 Andrew asks about index funds vs real estate allocation 4:04 Could Andrew reach lean-FIRE by paying off rentals? 5:00 Joe suggests keeping investments flexible vs mortgage payoff 8:05 Debate over HELOC vs index fund liquidity 10:10 Andrew's bigger dreams beyond real estate investing 17:40 Choosing between W2 security and entrepreneurial freedom 19:20 Andrew saves nearly entire salary while rentals cover bills 24:20 Chris worried about Gen Z kids' financial pessimism 28:40 How Joe helped his kids find relatable money role models 33:40 Millennials faced similar fears post-Great Recession 37:20 Today's expanded opportunities vs previous generations 43:20 Andrew's wake-up call at oil refinery job 49:20 Chris's daughter earning $35/hour on DoorDash 52:00 Finding meaning beyond retirement numbers For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode557 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#556: An anonymous caller was raised to work hard, live below his means, and save. He feels undeserving of his recent $1,000,000 inheritance and struggles to spend it. What should he do? Jack bought a house with a seven-year adjustable-rate mortgage. He’s confused about when and how he should refinance out of it. What should he do? Jack is also wondering how to do the breakeven calculation between contributing to a Traditional IRA with upfront income tax savings versus a Roth IRA with deferred savings on investment gains. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode556 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#555: Brandon Ganch (known online as MadFientist) joins us from Scotland to share how his life has transformed since retiring in 2016 at age 34. “I thought retirement was an age, not a function,” he said. “And when I realized it was just a math function, it changed my entire life.” Eight years into retirement, Brandon talks about how his spending and lifestyle have evolved. While his investment portfolio has grown "exponentially," he's had to push himself to spend more money. He and his wife have doubled their spending in the last three years, yet still haven't reached the 4 percent withdrawal rate that's common in early retirement. Having two young kids (a two-year-old son and one-month-old daughter) has changed their spending patterns. Restaurant bills and craft beer costs have dropped significantly, while they've invested in a house — their third, but the first one Brandon says he actually enjoys owning since he's no longer "hyper-frugal." Brandon shares his few regrets from his journey to financial independence, mainly missing friends' bachelor parties in his twenties because he didn't want to pay for two transatlantic flights in one month. The book "Die with Zero" has shifted his perspective on spending, making him realize there are "seasons in life" for certain experiences. Brandon suggests trying to live your "post-FI life" before actually reaching financial independence. By traveling for three months straight, he learned that constant travel wasn't actually what he wanted. He emphasizes that financial independence isn't just about early retirement — it's about having choices and power in your career. You can find Brandon at madfientist.com or listen to his music at madfientist.com/album. A Sampling of MadFientist Articles: Retirement withdrawal strategies: https://www.madfientist.com/discretionary-withdrawal-strategy/ Baseline portfolio vs. optimized portfolio: https://www.madfientist.com/guinea-pig-experiment/ FI spreadsheets: https://www.madfientist.com/financial-independence-spreadsheet/ FI laboratory: https://www.madfientist.com/resources/ How to use an HSA as a Super IRA: https://www.madfientist.com/ultimate-retirement-account/ How to Stack Tax Benefits: https://www.madfientist.com/stack-tax-benefits/ And of course, his passion project in retirement — the album: https://www.madfientist.com/album/ Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. 0:00 - Paula opens with a Guy Fawkes Day reference and historical background 2:06 - Brandon Ganch (MadFientist) introduces himself as having retired in 2016 at age 34 4:09 - Brandon explains how HR discovering his Scotland location led to his early retirement 7:01 - Discusses the "power of quitting" and how having FI helped him negotiate better work terms 11:26 - Explains how spending habits changed post-retirement, especially around house ownership 13:37 - Talks about having kids and how that decreased spending on travel, restaurants and beer 19:27 - Shares his only regrets about the FIRE journey, including missing friends' bachelor parties 26:58 - Discusses the "Die with Zero" book and its impact on his financial philosophy 33:32 - Explains why optimization and hyper-frugality are no longer priorities in his life 40:06 - Updates on his music passion project and performing live with his brother 44:21 - Advises people to start living their post-FI life before reaching financial independence 48:36 - Explains why FI might not be for everyone but financial security matters for all 51:28 - Shares thoughts on AI's impact on software development jobs and being glad he's already FI For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode555 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#554: The U.S. jobs market hit a surprising speed bump in October, adding just 12,000 new jobs — way below the expected 100,000.  A mix of natural disasters and labor unrest explains the slump. Recent hurricanes in the Southeast wiped out somewhere between 40,000 to 70,000 jobs, while strikes at Boeing and other companies added to the slowdown. Against this backdrop, the Federal Reserve looks ready to cut interest rates next week by 0.25 percent. Meanwhile, gold is having its biggest moment since 1979, but not for reasons you might expect. Central banks, especially in China and India, are loading up on physical gold like never before. Poland's central bank has grabbed 167 tons of gold and wants to keep 20 percent of its reserves in gold — a move that hints at banks preparing for possible global shake-ups. Remember when I-Bonds were the hot ticket in 2022, paying out 9.6 percent? Those glory days are gone. The new rate has dropped to 3.1 percent, making your standard high-yield savings account look pretty good in comparison. In the stock market, it's all about the "Magnificent Seven" — Apple, Microsoft, Alphabet, Amazon, Nvidia, Meta, and Tesla. These tech giants account for 62 percent of all S&P 500 gains over the past year. The other 493 companies aren't doing too shabby either, with profits expected to grow 13 percent next year. As for the upcoming election, both presidential candidates' economic plans would push the federal deficit higher. The Wharton School of Business says Trump's proposals would add $5.8 trillion to the deficit over 10 years, while Harris's would add $1.2 trillion. There's also talk about tariffs that could spark inflation and maybe even kick off a global trade war. Here's the kicker: during the 2016 election, a 24-year-old Sam Bankman-Fried correctly predicted the outcome before anyone else and made $300 million in a single night trading on that information. But by morning, the markets had swung so wildly that he'd lost $600 million.  The lesson? Even if you guess the election right, predicting how markets will react is a whole different ball game — one that you should avoid. Think long-term, buy-and-hold.  Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. 3:15 October jobs report falls short: only 12,000 new jobs added 7:45 Gold prices surge to 45-year high 11:30 Central banks lead global gold buying spree 16:20 The end of the gold standard 20:45 I-Bond rates plummet from 9.6 to 3.1 percent 24:03 The Magnificent 7 create most S&P 500 gains 28:58 US deficit hits 6 percent, tops G7 countries 33:31 Inflation risks and tariff concerns ahead of election 40:10 Why you shouldn't trade the upcoming election Resources Mentioned Wharton’s Trump Campaign Economic Analysis: https://budgetmodel.wharton.upenn.edu/issues/2024/8/26/trump-campaign-policy-proposals-2024 Wharton’s Harris Campaign Economic Analysis: https://budgetmodel.wharton.upenn.edu/issues/2024/8/26/harris-campaign-policy-proposals-2024 The Economist, Editorial Board Endorsement: https://www.economist.com/in-brief/2024/10/31/why-the-economist-endorses-kamala-harris Bloomberg Endorsement: https://www.bloomberg.com/opinion/articles/2024-10-31/michael-bloomberg-why-i-m-voting-for-kamala-harris The Financial Times endorsement, which is unfortunately behind a paywall: https://www.ft.com/content/3db1db35-f536-4efc-b463-a1fc98a785b0  For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode554 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#553: This is the third and final episode in a three-part series. Dr. Brad Klontz and Adrian Brambila join us to share 21 harsh truths about building wealth.  This episode focuses on the final 11 harsh truths, following up on their previous conversations about the first 10 harsh truths. The conversation begins with a key distinction: poor people buy stuff, while rich people buy time. They explain how wealthy people focus on building passive income streams rather than trading hours for objects. Brambila shares how he learned this lesson personally, discussing his pickleball court purchase through investment income rather than active work hours. The duo challenges common assumptions about luxury brands, arguing that people who constantly show off designer items are usually compensating for insecurity. Klontz shares his own experience of buying an expensive watch early in his career to prove his success. They examine whether college, marriage, and homeownership are necessary for wealth building. While data shows these traditional paths often lead to higher net worth, they acknowledge these aren't the only routes to financial success. On the topic of retirement, both guests argue that completely stopping work can be psychologically harmful, sharing examples of successful people who stayed active well into their later years. They break down specific money-saving strategies like getting roommates, using public transportation, and cutting your own hair. Brambila demonstrates how women can cut their own hair during the interview. The discussion covers specific side hustle opportunities, with detailed explanation of how to make money doing Amazon product reviews. Brambila shares how his videos have generated significant income, including $2,000 in a single day during Black Friday. They address money myths about credit cards, particularly the misconception about carrying balances to improve credit scores. Real examples and personal stories illustrate their points. Klontz shares how his 11-year-old son is making $5,000 monthly doing Amazon reviews, while Brambila discusses living in a van while earning six figures to demonstrate that wealth isn't about outward appearances. The episode concludes by connecting financial security to Maslow's hierarchy of needs, explaining how building wealth enables higher-level personal growth and positive impact. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. The provided timestamps are approximate and may be several minutes off due to changing ad lengths. 0:00 Introduction 2:02 Poor people buy stuff, rich people own time 13:20 Wealth mindset invests in passive income vs trading time 21:20 Only insecure people flex luxury brands 30:00 Debating necessity of college, marriage, homeownership 38:20 Why retirement can harm mental health 48:40 Wealthy people aren't afraid to ask for help 54:40 Don't rely on politics for financial freedom 1:03:20 Complaining keeps you poor 1:05:20 Alternative saving strategies: roommates, bus, sobriety 1:15:20 Netflix binging vs side hustles 1:19:40 Making money with Amazon product reviews 1:28:20 Credit cards must be paid in full monthly 1:31:00 The importance of thinking rich 1:33:30 Where to find more resources and bonuses For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode553 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#552: In this special three-part series, we discuss some of the 21 Harsh Truths About Money.  For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode552 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#551: Financial psychologist Dr. Brad Klontz and Youtuber Adrian Brambila join us to talk about money psychology, starting with a dark but revealing story about an experiment with dogs.  Scientists put dogs in electrified cages from which they couldn't escape. Eventually, the dogs stopped trying to escape and just lay down, even when later moved to cages where escape was possible. This 'learned helplessness' mirrors how people can get trapped in negative beliefs about money when they grow up with financial hardship. The conversation explores four main "money scripts" - deep beliefs about money that shape our behavior: 1. Money Avoidance: Thinking money is bad and rich people are evil 2. Money Worship: Believing more money will solve all problems 3. Money Status: Equating net worth with self-worth 4. Money Vigilance: Being careful and anxious about money (this one actually leads to the best financial outcomes) Adrian shares his journey from making $27,000 at a call center in Iowa to becoming successful through YouTube, explaining how he had to find mentors online since no one around him understood his goals. He talks about feeling like a "lone wolf" with uncommon aspirations in a small town. Dr. Brad reveals some surprising findings - like how meditation is linked to lower net worth (because being present-focused can work against future planning). His solution? "Automate before you meditate" - set up your savings and investments first. They discuss how your friend group shapes your money views. The FIRE (Financial Independence Retire Early) movement, for example, creates status around having high savings rates instead of fancy cars. But they note some FIRE followers end up "FIRED" - Financially Independent Retire Early Depressed - because they never learned to enjoy spending money. Dr. Brad shares a personal story about realizing in couples therapy that his fear of becoming poor was causing harmful stress, even though he was financially secure. This highlights a key theme: money scripts affect both rich and poor, and having more money doesn't automatically fix unhealthy money beliefs. All these insights come from Dr. Brad and Adrian's research and personal experiences, which they've collected in their book "Start Thinking Rich." The core message? Your money beliefs probably came from your childhood and culture, but you can change them once you understand them. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. 0:00 Intro to 3-part series on thinking rich 3:01 Psychology experiment reveals how learned helplessness affects money habits 8:12 Adrian's journey from call center worker to YouTuber 14:16 How friend groups sabotage financial success 19:52 Brad's struggle sharing book-writing aspirations 29:30 Being the lone ambitious person in a small town 40:24 Introduction to the concept of money scripts 48:20 Money script #1: avoiding wealth and villainizing rich people 56:52 American consumerism vs other cultures 1:02:40 Money script #2: believing money solves everything 1:09:20 Money script #3: equating net worth with self-worth 1:16:40 Money script #4: vigilance leads to better money outcomes 1:20:40 Why meditation correlates with lower wealth 1:22:48 When parents can't enjoy their retirement money 1:29:44 Overcoming the fear of becoming poor again For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode551 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#550: Paul Merriman, a former wealth manager turned financial educator, joins us to share investing wisdom that could reshape how you think about your money. We kick things off talking about portfolio diversification. Paul suggests a simple four-fund strategy that includes large cap, small cap, and value stocks. He says this mix has historically beaten the S&P 500 with lower risk. We then dive into international investing. Paul explains that while adding international stocks doesn't necessarily boost returns, it can help smooth out the ride. He keeps half his equity portfolio in international stocks, even at age 81. Got kids? Paul's got some advice for you too. He tells us about putting money aside for his new granddaughter, aiming to fund her Roth IRA as soon as she can earn income. He breaks down how investing just a dollar a day from birth to age 21 could turn into millions by retirement age. It's a powerful lesson in starting early and the magic of compound interest. We also chat about some common investing mistakes. Paul stresses that young investors often underestimate the power of stocks over bonds for long-term growth. He shares some eye-opening numbers: $100 invested in bonds since 1928 would have grown to about $12,000, while the same amount in small cap value stocks would be worth nearly $15 million. Paul wants you to think of investing as a partnership with businesses. When you buy a mutual fund, you're becoming a senior partner in thousands of companies. At first, your contributions drive most of the growth. But over time, market returns take over, and you become the junior partner to a much larger fortune. We wrap up with Paul sharing his excitement about a 40-hour financial education program he helped create at Western Washington University. It's designed to teach students essential money skills throughout their college years, from budgeting as freshmen to understanding 401(k)s as seniors. Throughout our chat, Paul's message is clear: start early, stay diversified, and think long-term. He believes that with the right education and mindset, anyone can build a solid financial future. 4 Fund Combo Guide https://www.paulmerriman.com/4-fund-combo#gsc.tab=0 Table Numbers https://soundinvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/04/Table-Numbers.pdf Quilt Charts https://soundinvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2021/01/2020-Year-End-Podcast-Charts.pdf Historical Risk and Return Tables https://www.paulmerriman.com/historical-risk-and-return-tables#gsc.tab=0 Portfolio Configurator https://lookerstudio.google.com/u/0/reporting/a941a5d4-0929-45ea-b22e-3bb82dc334ff/page/99wxc?s=hqmha3-AK5k Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. 0:00 Intro to Paul Merriman and podcast topic 0:57 Two-fund portfolio strategy 3:55 Four-fund portfolio strategy explained 5:31 Large cap performance concerns 7:06 S&P 500 vs Total Market Index 10:59 AI impact on large companies 14:43 Market trends and historical performance 20:41 International equity in portfolios 25:26 ETFs vs index funds 29:41 Non-US investor asset allocation 38:41 Setting up kids financially 43:57 Early investing importance 48:37 Common investor mistakes 50:25 Investing as business partnership 52:51 Evolving financial education landscape For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode550 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#549: Steven is stuck on the question of financial stability. How do you know if you have it? Is there an objective answer based on net worth? Or is it a calculation relative to your income and age? Jack isn’t sure how to factor his house into his net worth. It’s an asset, but he has a mortgage against it, and there are transaction costs associated with selling it. How should he frame it? Patricia and her husband are debt-free with a $2.2 million net worth, but she’s constantly stressed about their finances. Are her concerns valid? Or is she a financial hypochondriac? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode549 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#548: Economist Dr. Karsten Jeske talks with us about the current economic landscape. Karsten, who retired at 44, breaks down the Fed's recent decisions and how they might affect our finances. He explains how markets often anticipate interest rate changes before they happen. Karsten challenges traditional views on inflation and unemployment, telling us that textbook models don't always match reality. Karsten shares his personal investing experiences, covering both market highs and lows. He emphasizes the value of consistent investing regardless of market conditions. For those eyeing retirement, Karsten dives into safe withdrawal rates. He advises paying close attention to current market valuations when planning. On the topic of mortgages, he offers clear guidance on when refinancing makes sense. We also touch on economic history, discussing the Weimar Republic's hyperinflation. Karsten uses this to critique modern monetary theory, expressing skepticism about unrestricted money printing. Throughout our conversation, Karsten explains complex economic concepts in accessible terms. He draws on his background as both an academic and a Wall Street professional to provide well-rounded insights. Karsten, also known as Big ERN, is the author of EarlyRetirementNow.com, where he writes about safe withdrawal rates and personal finance while enjoying his retirement. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode548 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#547: An anonymous caller and her husband have a $2 million net worth at 40, but they’re worried that the one-fund portfolio that got them there isn’t good enough anymore. Are they right?  Jared feels frustrated that so much personal finance media is centered around tech and freelance workers. Does Paula and Joe have negotiation advice for someone in the union? Sam owns two overseas properties in a country that’s experienced runaway inflation for the past decade. He’s worried he’ll lose $500,000 worth of assets. How does he control the bleeding? Steve is calling back with an exciting update on his house-swapping journey from Episode 487.  Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode547 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#546: The Federal Reserve slashed interest rates by half a percentage point. What does this mean for your mortgage, your savings account, and the economy at large? In this First Friday economic episode, we dive deep into the Fed's decision. But that's just the beginning. As the presidential election looms, we'll also unpack the economic proposals from both candidates, examining how their plans for housing, taxes, and more could shape your financial future. We emphasize critical, non-partisan analysis of economic proposals. We want you to understand complex economic issues and their potential impacts, rather than advocating for specific political positions. Here are more specifics about this episode: The Federal Reserve's decision to cut interest rates by half a percentage point – the first rate reduction since the pandemic – is the biggest economic story of the month. We start by exploring the implications of the Federal Reserve’s rate cut, from falling mortgage and auto loan rates to potential increases in home prices and a tightening housing inventory. We also touch on the flip side: declining yields on high-interest savings accounts and CDs. We unpack the reasoning behind the Fed's decision, including shifting concerns from inflation to unemployment. We delve into economic indicators like the "dot plot" and "R-Star," explaining their significance in predicting future interest rates and economic trends. Then we discuss the latest jobs report, with 254,000 new jobs added in September, surpassing expectations. We break down the unemployment rate's drop to 4.1 percent. As the conversation shifts to the upcoming election, we take a nonpartisan approach to examining economic proposals from both presidential candidates. The episode focuses on policy rather than politics, encouraging critical thinking about each proposal's potential impacts. One area of bipartisan agreement - a proposal for no tax on tips for service workers - is scrutinized. We explain why economists across the political spectrum view this idea skeptically, highlighting the lack of specificity in defining "service workers" and "tips." Housing policy takes center stage, with both candidates proposing regulatory streamlining for home construction and opening federal lands for development. We discuss the limitations of federal intervention in what are often local zoning and regulatory issues. The episode also examines proposals for first-time homebuyer assistance, explaining how subsidizing demand in a supply-constrained market could potentially lead to higher housing prices. Throughout the discussion, we emphasize the importance of evaluating these policies based on their potential economic impacts rather than political affiliations. This episode will help you make more informed decisions about personal finances and policy preferences. Timestamps Note: timestamps will vary on individual devices based on advertising length 0:00 Introduction to the Fed's recent interest rate cut 2:35 Unpacking the impact of rate cuts on mortgages and savings 5:12 Explanation of the dot plot and R-Star concepts 9:47 Analysis of September's job report and unemployment figures 15:23 Discussion on labor force participation trends 21:08 Introduction to election-related economic policies 25:40 Examination of bipartisan "no tax on tips" proposal 31:15 Analysis of housing policies from both candidates 37:22 Critique of down payment assistance for first-time homebuyers 42:56 Exploration of the Tax Reform Act of 1986 and its housing impact 48:03 Discussion on proposed acts to limit corporate housing investments 52:17 Case study of Argentina's recent housing market changes For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode546 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#545: Kat feels thrown off. She’s realizing that the simple investing strategy that nearly 5x’d her portfolio in six years might be unwise. Should she course correct? And how? Ryan and his wife are torn between buying what they want (a single-family house) and what seems prudent (a multi-family house). How do they decide? Is there a third way? At 30, Danielle has saved enough for a traditional retirement. But she’s confused about how this meshes with planning for an early retirement. How should she think about money buckets? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode545 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#544: Remember that time you found a $20 bill in an old jacket pocket? The rush of excitement, followed by the quick mental math of what you could buy with it? That's your money mindset at work. In this episode, we dive deep into the psychology behind our financial decisions. You'll hear about the three money mindsets: anxious, obsessed, and avoidant. Ever clutched onto every penny out of fear? That's the anxious mindset. Spent big to impress others? Money obsession. Ever thought "I'd rather be happy than rich" or felt uncomfortable talking about money? These could be signs of a money-avoidant mindset. The episode shares a personal journey from being terrified of running out of money to developing a healthier relationship with finances. It's not just about saving or spending - it's about using money as a tool to express your values. You'll learn why being "good with money" isn't as simple as “just don’t spend it!” Think about Ebenezer Scrooge - he had plenty of cash but lived like a pauper. Is that really good money management? On the other end of the extreme, you have Montgomery Burns from The Simpsons as another example. He's loaded but obsessed with getting even richer, showing how the endless pursuit of wealth can leave you lonely and isolated. The talk covers how your beliefs about money can become self-fulfilling prophecies. If you think you're bad with money, you might make poor financial decisions without realizing it. You'll hear about the balance between time and money. Both are limited resources, and sometimes it's smart to spend money to buy back your time. After all, you can always make more money, but you can't make more time. This episode tackles the myth that work is always a drag. It suggests finding work that gives you a sense of purpose can lead to both job satisfaction and financial success. Investing comes up too. You'll learn why it's often simpler than the financial industry wants you to believe. Sometimes, doing less with your investments can lead to better results. We wrap up by talking about imposter syndrome - that feeling that you don't deserve your financial success. If you've ever felt like a fraud because your bank account looks better than it used to, you're not alone. Throughout the episode, you'll get insights into how your past experiences shape your current money habits. By the end, you'll have tools to start examining your own money mindset and working towards a healthier relationship with your finances. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode544 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#543: Picture this: You're at a car dealership, trying to get the best price on your dream car. The salesperson hits you with a "take it or leave it" offer. Your palms are sweaty, your heart's racing. What do you do? That's just one of the tricky situations we dive into in this episode. We're tackling seven types of hardball negotiation tactics that can trip you up in all sorts of situations - from asking for a raise to haggling at a flea market. First up, we break down the "take it or leave it" tactic. We share a real-life story of Sarah, a software developer, facing this exact situation in a job interview. You'll hear how she turned it around and got what she wanted. Next, we talk about psychological warfare. Sounds intense, right? It can be. We tell you about Emma, a graphic designer, who had to deal with a client trying to throw her off her game. You'll learn how she kept her cool and came out on top. Ever heard of the "good cop, bad cop" routine? It's not just in movies. We share a story of how this played out in a business deal and give you tips on how to spot it and handle it like a pro. Then there's the "snow job" - when someone dumps so much information on you that your head spins. We break down how to cut through the clutter and focus on what really matters. We also cover what to do when someone's holding back important info, how to spot a fake-out (when someone pretends to care about one thing but really wants another), and the sneaky "nibbling" tactic where people ask for just one more small thing... and then another... and another. For each tactic, we give you the lowdown on: What it looks like in action Why it works (yep, there's some psychology involved) How you can spot it What you can do to counter it We wrap up with a handy checklist for each tactic. Think of it as your negotiation cheat sheet. By the end of the episode, you'll have a toolkit of strategies to help you navigate tough negotiations, whether you're buying a car, negotiating your salary, or just trying to decide where to go for dinner with your friends. Remember, negotiation isn't about "winning" at all costs. It's about finding solutions that work for everyone. With the tips from this episode, you'll be better equipped to do just that, even when things get tricky. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode543 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#542: Ever feel like you're never doing enough with your money, even when your finances look good on paper? You're not alone. Katie Gatti Tassin, host of the Money with Katie podcast, dives into a phenomenon called "money dysmorphia" in today’s interview. She shares how she got flooded with responses when she asked her listeners about money dysmorphia. Folks with hefty savings and investments still worry they're not doing enough. It's like they're always waiting for the other shoe to drop. Where does this come from? Katie points to a few culprits. Social media is an obvious scapegoat. But traditional media plays a role too. Think about all those TV shows where "normal" families live in massive houses and drive fancy cars. It skews our perception of what's average. Location matters too. Katie talks about how moving from Dallas to Fort Collins changed her spending habits. Different cities have different vibes and social norms around money. The conversation takes an interesting turn when Katie shares her own experience buying a Porsche. She felt conflicted, worried her FIRE (Financial Independence, Retire Early) community would judge her. It highlights how even personal finance experts grapple with these issues. They also touch on how the pandemic shook up financial priorities. When faced with uncertainty, some people realized saving for a far-off future might not be the only goal worth pursuing. Katie and Paula discuss the importance of balance. It's good to save, but not at the expense of living your life now. They suggest seeking out voices in the personal finance world to get a more rounded perspective. Travel comes up as a way to gain financial perspective. Seeing how people live in other parts of the world can make you appreciate what you have or show you where your own country could improve. Katie and Paula offer food for thought on how to navigate our complex relationship with money. It's a conversation that might make you think differently about your own financial mindset. Timestamps Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. 01:13 - Define money dysmorphia concept 02:22 - Social media's influence on financial perceptions 03:57 - Traditional media's impact on financial normalcy 06:03 - Wealth displays in TV and movies 09:52 - Regional cultures affect spending habits 11:35 - Social engineering in consumer culture 14:36 - TV shows shape perceptions of normal lifestyles 17:19 - Lower-income portrayal in media 20:22 - Social circles influence financial habits 23:35 - Importance of balance in financial perspectives 26:34 - Travel's role in gaining financial perspective 29:12 - Key takeaways about money dysmorphia 31:30 - Media's influence on financial normalcy perception 33:46 - Balancing future planning with present enjoyment For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode542 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#541: Ever wondered if you're making the right choice between a Traditional and Roth 401(k)? You're not alone.  In this episode, Katie Gatti Tassin, host of MorningBrew’s Money with Katie podcast, joins us to tackle this common retirement savings dilemma. We deep-dive into the debate between using Traditional vs. Roth 401(k) accounts for retirement savings, in the context of: Future tax rates  Tax complexities for small business owners and high earners Social Security uncertainty Stock-based compensation  Incentives for business owners vs. employees Katie explains her strategy for maximizing retirement savings while minimizing taxes. She suggests that for some people in higher tax brackets, maxing out a traditional 401(k) and then investing the tax savings elsewhere might be the way to go.  But as we dig deeper, it becomes clear that there's no one-size-fits-all answer. We explore the Traditional vs Roth question, discussing how your current income and expected retirement spending can affect your choices.  It's not just about the math, though. The unpredictability of future tax rates and policies adds another layer of complexity to the decision. Social Security plays a major role, as well. We discuss its current funding situation and the challenges it might face in the future.  This leads to a fascinating discussion about how AI might impact future costs and lifestyles. Could things actually get cheaper in the future?  Taxes for high earners and small business owners is another focus. We break down some misconceptions about who falls into high tax brackets. It's not always as simple as it seems. Stock-based compensation is another hot topic. We discuss how it affects corporate decision-making and the wider economy. This leads to an interesting comparison of the incentives for business owners versus employees. Throughout the episode, we keep coming back to one key point: no matter which type of account you choose, the most important thing is to contribute as much as you can.  Your contribution amount has a bigger impact on your retirement savings than the type of account you use. By the end of this interview, you'll have a better understanding of the factors that go into choosing between a Traditional and Roth 401(k). More importantly, you'll see how this decision fits into the bigger picture of retirement planning and overall financial health. Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. Here are the condensed timestamps and descriptions: 0:00 Introduction 1:46 Katie explains strategy for maximizing retirement savings 3:19 Discuss assumptions behind traditional vs Roth 401(k) decisions 5:54 Compare scenarios of traditional and Roth contributions 8:54 Explore how income affects retirement account choice 13:51 Talk about media's impact on financial perceptions 15:20 Discuss unpredictability of future tax policies 18:03 Explain current state of Social Security funding 21:05 Explore AI's potential impact on future costs 24:41 Discuss how location influences spending habits 28:16 Examine tax implications for high earners 31:12 Talk about effects of stock-based compensation 33:55 Compare incentives for business owners vs employees 36:06 Emphasize importance of contribution amounts For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode541 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Originally aired August 2023: Stanford psychology professor Jamil Zaki shares his research and findings around the science of empathy – and how we can apply this to improving our relationships with colleagues, clients, customers, co-founders, and business and investing cohorts. Zaki is the director of the Stanford Social Neuroscience Lab, and the author of “The War For Kindness.” We'll break down the science. We talk about why empathy matters in business, investments, and in career growth, and we’ll discuss its digital age dynamics. How does AI impact the way in which we relate to others? If you want to learn the science of emotional intelligence, and how to apply this to your career and business interactions, you’ll learn a lot from today’s episode. Enjoy! The original show notes can be found at https://affordanything.com/episode456 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#540: What can M&Ms, McDonalds, Harry Potter, Aquafina, Taylor Swift, Jeopardy, and Bed Bath & Beyond teach us about landing a dream job or securing a promotion? Plenty. Imagine you're at a job interview. You've rehearsed your answers, polished your resume, and you're feeling confident. But what if the key to landing that job isn't just about your skills and experience? What if it's about how you make people feel? How you make people feel is your brand, Zane says.  That's what Leslie Zane, a Harvard Business School alum and prominent branding expert, talks about in this interview. She says that whether you're trying to get a new job, a promotion, or more customers for your small business, it all comes down to how you build your personal brand. Zane breaks it down into three main ideas: be salient, be relevant, and be distinctive. Being salient means making sure people remember you. It's not just about doing your job well, but about connecting with people all over your company. Zane gives an example of a dental hygienist who calls patients after their appointments to check on them and offer advice. This extra touch helps the hygienist stick in people's minds. Being relevant is about focusing on the good stuff. Zane says if you make a mistake at work, don't dwell on it. Instead, do more good things to push out the bad memory. She talks about how McDonald's dealt with rumors about "pink slime" in their food. Instead of denying it over and over, they started showing how they make their food with fresh ingredients. This helped people forget about the pink slime and think about good things instead. Being distinctive means standing out, but in a way that still feels familiar. Zane tells a story about the game show Jeopardy. When the longtime host Alex Trebek died, the producers tried inviting different celebrities to host the show. But viewers didn't like it. The ratings only rose when they chose Ken Jennings, a former champion contestant, as the new host. He was familiar enough that viewers felt comfortable with him. Zane also talks about how these ideas can help small businesses. She says it's important to reach out to new customers, not just focus on the ones you already have. She suggests finding ways to connect your business to things that people already enjoy. If you run an accounting firm in Kansas City, for example, you might talk about local sports teams or famous barbecue to help people feel a connection to your business. Throughout the interview, Zane emphasizes that building a strong personal brand isn't about bragging or being fake. It's about creating genuine connections with people and consistently showing your best qualities. You’re creating buzz about yourself. The more positive connections you make, the stronger your brand becomes. Zane's advice goes against some common ideas about marketing and self-promotion. She says you don't need to stick to just one thing or only target a specific group of people. Instead, she encourages reaching out to as many people as possible and finding ways to connect your skills or business to things they already care about. Timestamps Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic ad lengths 0:00 - Importance of becoming a personal brand for career growth 6:04 - Tapping into the instinctive mind 8:54 - How brands grow in people's minds 13:40 - Situational salience using M&M's example 18:40 - Why Harry Potter is a salient brand 24:23 - Three key elements of building a personal brand 29:20 - McDonald's addressing negative brand associations 35:40 - Be distinctive, not unique 41:00 - Jeopardy! host change and brand continuity 46:56 - Creating buzz about yourself at work 52:40 - Why core customers can be a business trap 57:20 - Handling negative feedback or associations 1:02:40 - Tips for standing out in job interviews For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode540 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#539: An anonymous caller feels trapped. She owes $100,000 in back taxes on earnings she had to give up as a result of a lawsuit with her former business partner. What should she do? Saul and his wife want to retire in Mexico but they don’t want to give up the ability to continue investing in US stocks. Can they buy a primary residence that doubles as a short-term rental? Nina and her partner are eager to start a $500,000 renovation on their home but they’re still three years away from saving enough. How can they bridge the gap without risking too much? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode539 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#538: The latest jobs report just dropped, and it's a game-changer. Job creation numbers are lower than expected, at 142,000 new jobs in August. This comes on the heels of the biggest downward revision in job numbers since 2009. We're diving deep into what this means for the Federal Reserve's long-anticipated first rate cut. Are we looking at a modest quarter-point cut in interest rates, or a more substantial half-point drop? The Fed's decision could mean the difference between that dream house being within reach or slipping away. We'll break down the latest data and translate what it means for you. In our second segment, we're celebrating Warren Buffett's 94th birthday by exploring how he continues to lead Berkshire Hathaway with razor-sharp acumen — and what this teaches us about aging. Finally, we'll turn our attention to Selena Gomez, who just became a billionaire. Around 81% of her wealth comes from her makeup line; only 3% of her net worth comes from acting and singing. Her story highlights the power of entrepreneurship in building massive wealth. Join us for a blend of timely economic analysis and inspiring success stories. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode538 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#537: Frequent contributor Joe Saul-Sehy shares an emotional, personal story of getting into a soul-crushing level of debt in his 20s and early 30s. He owed so much in back taxes to the IRS that he didn’t file a tax return for three years. He ran out of gas and was stranded on the side of the highway, with 85 cents remaining in his bank account. By the time he pulled himself out of debt, his twin son and daughter were seven years old. Learn the gripping, gut-wrenching story of Joe’s past money mistakes in today’s episode. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode537 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#536: NYU Psychology Professor Dr. Tessa West has spent nearly two decades studying relationships, including those in the workplace. She talks about her research on why people feel disconnected from their jobs and what to do about it. Dr. West breaks down five main ways people might feel unhappy at work: 1. Crisis of identity: This is when you've poured a lot into your career, but you're starting to question if it's really who you are anymore. 2. Drifting apart: This happens when your job changes, not you. Maybe your company's gone through some big shifts, or your day-to-day tasks are different now. Or maybe your industry has totally changed. 3. Stretched too thin: We've all been there - too much to do and not enough time. 4. Runner up: Always close to that promotion or raise, but never quite getting there. 5. Underappreciated star: You're doing great work, but no one seems to notice. Dr. West digs into each of these, explaining what they look like and why they happen. She talks about how work relationships are a lot like romantic relationships — just as you might feel disconnected from a partner, you can feel the same way about your job. She describes a matrix that shows how satisfied you are with your job versus how much you identify with it.  She also gets practical stuff, describing how to manage distractions at work and be more productive. There's a neat concept called "working spheres" that might help you organize your tasks better. If you're thinking about leaving your job, Dr. West suggests doing some self-reflection and networking to learn about other industries or companies. She warns that there's often a lot of "hidden" stuff about jobs that you won't find in the job description, so it's essential to dig deeper. At the end, she talks about how to figure out if a new job will actually be better. Her main tip? Ask tough questions in interviews. Don't be afraid to dig into the not-so-great parts of the job or company. Dr. West doesn't sugarcoat the tough parts of work life, but she offers practical advice for dealing with them. Whether you're happy in your job or thinking about a change, you'll find something useful here. Timestamps Note: Timestamps will vary slightly on individual listening devices based on dynamic ad lengths. 1:09 - Dr. Tessa West. Psychology professor. Workplace relationships. 3:10 - Five major ways people feel disconnected from work. 4:55 - Work relationships mirroring other relationship types. 9:04 - "Crisis of identity" at work. 13:40 - Matrix: job satisfaction vs. identity centrality. 18:20 - "Drifting apart" from your career. 21:40 - Common changes causing career drift. 25:55 - "Stretched too thin" at work. 29:35 - Managing external work disruptions. 31:40 - "Working spheres" for better productivity. 37:37 - "Runner up" at work. 40:29 - Common reasons for not getting promoted. 47:51 - "Underappreciated star" at work. 51:18 - Next steps if unhappy at work. 55:56 - Determining if a new job will be better. For more information, go to https://affordanything.com/episode536 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#535: Melissa and her partner are preparing for the best earning years of their lives. Could they benefit from automated tax-loss harvesting and transition from DIY investing to a robo-advisor? An anonymous caller just learned something surprising about their Roth 401k and feels squeamish about making future contributions to this account. What’s Paula and Joe’s advice? Hampton is following up on a question from Episode 524 to spark an intriguing discussion on the generational tax advantages of a Roth IRA. Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode535 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#534: We sit down with David Novak, the co-founder and former CEO of Yum! Brands, the giant parent company behind KFC, Taco Bell, Pizza Hut, and the Habit Burger Grill. David shares stories from his remarkable career, offering insights into leadership, decision-making, and personal growth. We dive into one of David’s most memorable projects: the creation of Crystal Pepsi. David talks about how the idea was born out of a gut instinct when he noticed a trend toward clear beverages. The media buzz was massive, and he was convinced it was a winner. But the Pepsi bottlers pushed back, saying it didn’t taste enough like traditional Pepsi. David pressed on anyway. The product launched to a lot of fanfare but ultimately flopped.  David reflects on this experience as a lesson in the importance of listening to feedback, even when you’re sure you’re right. The conversation then shifts to David’s unique upbringing. He lived in 23 different states before high school. This taught David to adapt quickly, make friends fast, and assess people and situations—a skill set that became invaluable in his leadership roles. David then takes you through his early career, from being a mediocre student who found his passion in advertising, to making a pivotal move from marketing to operations at PepsiCo. This shift was crucial, setting him up to eventually lead Yum! Brands.  David’s journey is filled with stories of hard decisions, like turning down a bigger job at Frito-Lay because it didn’t align with what truly made him happy. He shares his philosophy on prioritizing joy and finding fulfillment in your work, a principle that guided his entire career. Leadership is a major theme in the discussion. David talks about the balance between confidence and humility, using Warren Buffett as an example of someone who embodies both. He also shares his thoughts on how to handle criticism and feedback.  According to David, the key is to listen carefully, avoid being defensive, and understand whether the feedback is valid before making decisions. David also offers practical advice on personal development. He talks about his “Three by Five” exercise, where he regularly assesses who he is today and what he needs to work on to become more effective. This habit of self-reflection has helped him stay grounded and continually improve as a leader. The episode wraps up with a discussion on company culture. David believes that creating an environment where everyone feels valued is essential for success. He emphasizes the importance of leaders modeling the behavior they want to see in their teams and being the first to extend trust and positivity. David’s stories and insights provide a deep dive into what it takes to lead a major company, make tough decisions, and continually grow both personally and professionally. Timestamps Note: Timestamps will vary on individual devices due to dynamic advertising run times. 0:00 - Introduction to David Novak and his leadership background 6:17 - David’s personal journey and learning framework 11:25 - Importance of listening to feedback in decision-making 17:31 - Impact of frequent childhood moves on David’s adaptability 23:32 - Identifying and focusing on what brings joy in life and work 29:26 - Value of learning that leads to action 35:58 - Overcoming challenges by reframing your approach 42:20 - Learning from mentors who have succeeded in your field 48:35 - Criteria for board membership: contributing and learning. 54:47 - Building a high-performance culture at Yum! Brands 1:01:02 - Mapping out learning needs for project success 1:07:25 - Gaining confidence and skills for leadership 1:13:23 - Maintaining integrity and taking the high ground 1:19:03 - A mentor relationship that shaped David’s leadership 1:26:02 - Evaluating what successful companies are doing right For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode534 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#533: Kristin is floored by the 60 percent increase in her homeowner’s insurance this year. Should she cancel the policy and self-insure instead? Susana and her husband are torn. They bought their dream home last year but now need to relocate indefinitely. What should they do with the house? An anonymous caller wants to help his soon-to-be wife invest a five-figure gift she received in another country. How do they untangle the complexities of managing money from abroad? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode533 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#532: We’re diving deep into the art of negotiation, especially when it comes to asking for a raise. The episode is broken down into three main parts, each designed to give you practical tools and insights that you can apply right away. First up, setting the stage. Before you even think about negotiating, it’s crucial to understand the difference between “interests” and “positions.” You’ll learn why knowing the underlying reasons behind what both you and the other party want is key to finding a win-win solution. We’ll also talk about how to prepare yourself, including knowing your BATNA (Best Alternative to a Negotiated Agreement), your aspiration point, and your reservation point. Plus, you’ll get tips on how to build rapport and strategically frame your requests to set the tone for a successful negotiation. Next, we move into taking action. Here’s where you get the practical strategies you can use during the negotiation itself. We’ll cover techniques like anchoring—where you set the initial offer to guide the conversation—and how to make strategic concessions. You’ll also learn about the power of silence, managing your emotions, and making sure that any concessions you make are balanced by getting something in return. Finally, we tackle more complex situations. Sometimes, negotiations aren’t straightforward. Maybe you’re dealing with a difficult negotiator who’s being aggressive, uncooperative, or even deceitful. In this part, we’ll discuss how to handle these tricky scenarios while still aiming for a win-win outcome. Throughout the episode, you’ll get a clear, actionable framework that you can use to negotiate effectively, whether it’s for a raise, closing a business deal, or even in your personal life. The focus is on preparation, understanding what both sides truly want, and using smart strategies to reach an agreement that works for everyone. ____ Timestamps Note: Timestamps will vary on individual devices based on dynamic advertising run times 1:15 - Introduces negotiation, focusing on asking for a raise 3:45 - Explains interests vs. positions in negotiation 6:10 - Prepares by knowing your BATNA, aspiration, and reservation points 9:30 - Builds rapport and trust before negotiating 12:20 - Frames arguments to align with other party’s interests 15:05 - Introduces anchoring to set the tone 18:40 - Makes concessions while ensuring reciprocity 22:10 - Uses silence strategically in negotiations 25:55 - Manages emotions, avoids triggers in tense talks 29:40 - Creates value by expanding negotiation scope 33:25 - Prioritizes and bundles issues in multi-issue negotiations 37:15 - Deals with difficult negotiators like aggressors and stonewallers 41:00 - Recognizes closing signals to finalize a deal 44:45 - Documents agreements to avoid post-settlement disputes 47:30 - Reflects on each negotiation to improve For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode532 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#531: Let's talk about negotiations. You know, those back-and-forth talks where you try to get the best deal possible on a used car, a house, or a couch on Facebook Marketplace? Or when you ask your boss for a raise? Turns out, asking the right questions can be a game-changer. According to Jeff Wetzler, Ed.D., people often hold back information when they're negotiating. They might be worried about looking bad or giving away too much. But if you can get them talking, you can learn a lot. It's like peeling an onion – layer by layer, you discover what really matters to the other person. The key is to be curious and listen carefully. Show the other person you're interested in what they have to say. And don't just focus on what they're saying; pay attention to how they say it. Their body language and tone can tell you a lot. By understanding the other person's point of view, you can find ways to work together and reach a deal that benefits everyone. It's all about building trust and finding common ground. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode531 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#530: We sit down with financial educator Brian Feroldi to dive into the often-overlooked world of stock-based compensation. This form of compensation is becoming more common, especially in large companies, but many employees don’t fully understand how to make the most of it. Brian helps break down the basics, explaining what stock-based compensation is and why companies use it to attract and retain employees. We start by discussing why companies offer stock options or restricted stock units (RSUs) instead of just higher salaries or bonuses. Brian explains that stock-based compensation is a way for companies to align your interests with the success of the business. When you own a piece of the company, you’re more likely to care about its performance, which can drive you to work harder and stay longer. This also allows companies to conserve cash while still offering competitive compensation packages. Brian also highlights the importance of understanding the different types of stock-based compensation. He breaks down stock options, where you have the right to buy company stock at a set price, and RSUs, where you’re given shares of stock that vest over time. Each has its pros and cons, and understanding these differences can help you make better decisions about your compensation. One of the key takeaways from our discussion is the importance of negotiation. Brian emphasizes that the best time to negotiate stock-based compensation is when you’re first hired. Companies often have more flexibility with stock options than with salary, so it’s crucial to ask for more stock or a shorter vesting period upfront. This can make a big difference in your long-term financial gains, especially if the company’s stock value increases over time. We also touch on the tax implications of stock-based compensation. Brian explains that different types of stock options are taxed differently, and understanding these tax rules can help you minimize your tax bill. For instance, holding onto stock after exercising options can lead to lower taxes if the stock price rises and you qualify for long-term capital gains. Throughout the interview, Brian shares practical tips for you, such as targeting companies in industries like technology and healthcare that are known for generous stock-based compensation packages. He advises you to educate yourself on your company’s specific policies and to be proactive in managing your stock options to avoid leaving money on the table. By the end of the episode, you’ll have a clearer understanding of stock-based compensation and how to leverage it to build wealth. Brian’s insights are particularly valuable if you’re switching jobs and want to maximize your compensation package. Resource Mentioned: Finchat.io For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode530 Timestamps: Note: Timestamps will vary on individual devices based on dynamic advertising run times. 2:16 - Explain why companies offer stock compensation over salaries 4:00 - Discuss how stock compensation aligns employee and company goals 7:28 - Introduce types of stock compensation: stock options vs. RSUs 12:24 - Explain the significance of vesting schedules 17:00 - Discuss tax implications of stock options and RSUs 28:00 - Emphasize the long-term impact of stock-based compensation on financial independence 34:00 - Identify industries with high stock compensation, like tech and healthcare 40:00 - Discuss benefits of Employee Stock Purchase Plans (ESPPs) Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#529: Anonymous, 60, recently lost her job and is worried about retirement. She owns a paid-off triplex, living in one unit and renting the others for $30,000 a year. She used her 401(k) funds to buy the triplex and now has $50,000 in retirement savings and $150,000 in cash. She expects only $2,400 a month from Social Security at age 67. After losing her son two years ago, she's seeking advice on managing her underfunded retirement. Noelle, 40, and her husband, 49, want to cancel his whole life insurance policy. They are debt-free, own their home, and plan to retire soon, relying on Noelle's $80,000 income. They have $504,000 in retirement savings. Should Noelle keep her $100,000 term life policy until she retires? Sleepless in San Antonio, age 35, plans to retire at 45 but is concerned about how this will affect Social Security benefits, which is calculated based on the top 35 earning years. Should they work longer in order to boost their Social Security benefits? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode529 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#528: The Federal Reserve recently decided to hold interest rates steady, leading to significant shifts in the stock market. The Dow dropped over 850 points, and the NASDAQ entered correction territory, falling more than 10% from its peak. But what do these numbers mean for you? We break down the latest jobs report, which shows a rise in unemployment to 4.3%, triggering a recession indicator known as the Sahm Rule. This isn't just economic jargon; it affects real lives, impacting job security, investments, and financial planning. We discuss potential ripple effects on various sectors, such as real estate, where interest rates influence housing affordability.  We also examine the technology sector's volatility and how recent market corrections might influence tech stocks and the overall investment landscape. Understanding this can help you make informed decisions about your investment portfolio. Every First Friday of the month, we bring you our "First Friday Monthly Economic Report," where we help you make sense of these trends.  We aim to make complex economic concepts accessible. Join us as we explore these pressing economic issues.  Timestamps Note: Timestamps will vary on individual listening devices based on dynamic advertising run times. 1:23 - Discuss the Fed's decision to hold interest rates steady and its economic impact. 3:15 - Explore how recent economic changes affect the Dow and NASDAQ for investors. 5:30 - Explain the SAM rule and why unemployment rising to 4.3% matters. 7:45 - Analyze how interest rates affect housing affordability and real estate. 10:05 - Examine tech sector volatility and its impact on stocks and investments. 12:30 - Look into how economic trends influence consumer spending patterns. 14:42 - Offer tips on managing debt, building emergency funds, and smart investments. 17:03 - Stress the importance of informed decision-making and understanding trade-offs. 19:27 - Highlight the role of "First Friday Monthly Economic Reports" in understanding trends. 21:15 - Wrap up with insights for applying knowledge to financial decision-making. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode528 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#527: Luke and his wife are breaking some personal finance rules in the name of financial independence. Are they right to take this approach or is there a better way? Christina is worried. She’s retired with a paid-off condo in Florida. But rising fees, insurance rates, and a major HOA assessment are killing her cash flow. Is it time to become a renter? Les is surprised by Paula and Joe’s allocation recommendations for international equities. Based on market capitalization, it makes no sense. What’s he missing? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode527 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#526: Recorded LIVE on stage at the Morningstar Conference in Chicago! We chat with behavioral finance professor Meir Statman. He breaks down the differences between standard finance and behavioral finance, making it clear that understanding human behavior is an essential part of investing. Statman starts by explaining that standard finance assumes people are rational. They make decisions purely based on logic and aim to maximize wealth. However, behavioral finance sees people as normal, not always rational. We often act on emotions and cognitive shortcuts. For instance, people might prefer receiving dividends over selling shares, even if both result in the same financial gain. This is because dividends feel like income, while selling shares feels like dipping into savings. He uses a great metaphor to explain how investors view their portfolios. Think of a dinner plate: behavioral investors like their investments separated, like mashed potatoes on one side, vegetables on another, and steak in the middle. Rational investors don’t care if it’s all blended together because they only focus on the total nutrients. This shows that normal investors have different needs and want to balance safety with growth. Statman talks about the importance of diversification. He recalls a lunch with Harry Markowitz, the father of Modern Portfolio Theory, who supported the idea of having a mix of safe and risky investments. Markowitz himself had municipal bonds to avoid poverty and stocks to grow wealth. Diversifying helps investors manage risk and meet both their safety and growth needs. We then dive into how people manage money across their life cycle. Statman points out that young people know they need to save but are tempted to spend. They often control this urge by putting money into retirement accounts like 401(k)s. As people get older, they become so good at saving that they sometimes forget to spend and enjoy their money. Statman gives a funny example of his mother-in-law, who refused to replace an old sofa because she didn’t want to dip into her savings. Statman also touches on asset pricing and market efficiency. He explains that while traditional finance focuses solely on risk, behavioral finance considers other factors like social responsibility. Some investors are willing to accept lower returns to stay true to their values. Additionally, he argues that market prices do not always reflect true value, and it’s hard to predict when they will. Towards the end, we discuss the broader aspects of wellbeing. Statman emphasizes that financial wellbeing is just one part of a happy life. Family, health, work, and community are also crucial. He believes financial advisors should help clients achieve overall life wellbeing, not just financial success. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode526 Timestamps Note: Timestamps vary on individual listening devices based on advertising run times. 1:23 - Explain the differences between standard and behavioral finance. 4:30 - Discuss Harry Markowitz's influence on modern investment strategies. 6:08 - Highlight life cycle investing and saving/spending behaviors over a lifetime. 10:02 - Explore mental accounting and differentiating between income and capital. 11:14 - Talk about common trading mistakes due to cognitive errors. 14:26 - Discuss utilitarian, expressive, and emotional benefits of financial decisions. 17:41 - Explain the difference between System 1 and System 2 thinking. 21:39 - Discuss how emotions and moods impact investment decisions. 25:59 - Explore the concept of regret and how it affects financial decisions. 30:21 - Emphasize the importance of human touch in financial advising. 44:00 - Discuss the impact of AI on different industries and investment decisions. 48:24 - Highlight the need to balance financial wellbeing with overall life wellbeing. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#525: We chat with renowned financial advisor Michael Kitces at the Morningstar Investor Conference in Chicago. Kitces answers a big question: Is the economy worse than we think? He explains that a few big companies like Nvidia, Meta, and Alphabet are holding up the S&P 500. But this doesn’t mean the economy is bad. It's common for a small group of companies to drive the market. Since it’s hard to predict which companies will do well, he stresses the need for diversification. Kitces tells us to focus on long-term growth instead of trying to time the market. He shares a famous quote from economist John Maynard Keynes: "Markets can remain irrational longer than you can remain solvent." This means it’s better to invest broadly and wait for the market to grow over time. Kitces also says that career development is important. He believes boosting your income through career advancements can have a bigger impact on your financial health than trying to get the highest returns on your investments. He says, "Spending more time focusing on my career and getting a raise... will actually be more meaningful than trying to improve the returns on my own money." We discuss the importance of index investing and proper asset allocation. Kitces advises owning a diversified portfolio that includes international and small-cap funds. Even if these funds aren’t performing well in the short term, diversification helps spread risk and capture growth from different sectors and markets. Kitces talks about the cyclical nature of markets. Some people worry that the market will go down just because it’s been up for a long time. He explains that markets don’t "die of old age." Many factors influence market cycles, and it’s hard to predict when a downturn will happen. This reinforces the idea that staying invested and diversified is usually the best strategy. Finally, we talk about inflation and interest rates. Kitces explains that it’s hard to predict when inflation will return to the Fed’s target rate of 2 percent. This means that interest rates might stay high for a while. It’s important to keep a long-term perspective and not make drastic changes based on short-term market movements. This episode offers practical advice on investment strategies, the importance of diversification, and why focusing on your career can be more beneficial than trying to outsmart the market. Kitces’ insights help anyone who wants to reach financial freedom. Timestamps [Note: Time codes will vary on individual listening devices based on advertising run times.] 1:23 - Becoming a famous financial advisor. 2:08 - Role of a small number of companies in holding up the S&P 500. 5:11 - NVIDIA's role in AI and cryptocurrency. 7:38 - Importance of diversification. 11:27 - Irrationality and efficiency of markets. 16:26 - Role of international and small-cap funds in diversification. 18:10 - Impact of regulatory frameworks on AI development. 32:11 - Demographic advantages of emerging markets. 40:01 - Cyclical nature of markets and investor fears. 51:30 - Inflation and wage growth. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode525 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#524: Mark and his partner will soon inherit an IRA worth over a quarter million dollars. With today’s elevated interest rates, would throwing it all at a primary residence be the smartest play?  An anonymous caller and his girlfriend are musicians who dream of building a home with a monetizable recording studio. How do they untangle personal wants from business needs? Will feels stumped about the options in his defined benefit pension plan. When should he choose a guaranteed annuity over a lump sum payment?  Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode524 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#523: How much is an hour of your time worth? Google's Executive Productivity Advisor , Laura Mae Martin, joins us to answer that question. Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#522: Emily Anne is worried about her obsessive tracking behavior. She’s in great financial shape but struggles to shake the constant compulsion to check her accounts. What should she do? An anonymous caller and his partner plan to use geo-arbitrage to retire early before reaching their financial independence number. Can they have their cake and eat it too? Kevin and his wife are having second thoughts about their Delaware Statutory Trust (DST) real estate investments. How do they back out without compromising their estate plan? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode522 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#521: If you're a longtime listener, you'll enjoy this candid, behind-the-scenes conversation about entrepreneurship and growth between Paula Pant and former financial advisor and Stacking Benjamins host Joe Saul-Sehy. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode521 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#520: Happy 248th birthday, USA! In this 5th of July First Friday economic update, we cover five topics: the economic impact of elections in the UK; the S&P 500 topping 5500; the effect of the Supreme Court’s Chevron ruling on Social Security and retirement planning; the latest jobs report; and California’s new law allowing accessory dwelling units to get sold separately as condos. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode520 Resources Mentioned: UK’s Office for National Statistics: May 2024 report SupremeCourt.gov: Loper Bright Enterprises v. Raimondo Federal Register: SSA Social Security Administration: Will Social Security Be There for Me? Bureau of Labor Statistics: June 2024 jobs report Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#519: We sit down with Jim Kwik, a brain coach and expert in memory improvement, speed reading, and optimal learning. As a child, Jim suffered a brain injury that made learning difficult. He was labeled "the boy with the broken brain," which deeply affected his confidence and performance in school. Today, he’s an expert in memory, focus, learning, cognition and mental performance. He’s here to remind us that our brains are our number one wealth-building tool. He talks to us about strategies for improving memory. He debunks myths like multitasking being efficient. He talks about the negative impact of digital distractions and the myth that we only use 10% of our brains. He describes a great brain diet, and discusses nootropics and other brain supplements. This episode is packed with practical advice. If you want to improve your memory, learn faster, and maintain better brain health, you’ll enjoy Jim Kwik’s tips. Timestamps: [Note: Time codes will vary on individual listening devices based on advertising run times.] 0:58 - Jim shares his childhood experience with a traumatic brain injury 2:26 - Impact of being labeled "the boy with the broken brain" 3:59 - Struggles with school and a turning point with a friend’s father 5:33 - Encouragement to write down dreams, leading to a new perspective 8:22 - Introduction to personal development books and reading challenges 9:59 - Consequences of overworking and lack of self-care during college 10:45 - Realization of the need for better learning methods 11:50 - Breakthrough in understanding learning and memory techniques 12:25 - Teaching others and a student’s powerful story 13:35 - Importance of knowledge as a superpower 13:50 - Introduction to the concept of building a better brain 15:03 - Description of the four brain types and their traits 17:23 - Significance of understanding one’s brain type 19:18 - The forgetting curve and memory retention 20:11 - The three keys to a better memory using the "MOM" method 21:01 - The importance of motivation in remembering names and other information 22:37 - The role of observation in memory and being present 23:15 - Anecdote about Bill Clinton’s exceptional memory and presence 24:55 - Connection between being present and having a powerful memory 26:11 - The concept of "digital distraction" and its impact on focus 26:56 - The "four horsemen of the mental apocalypse" driven by technology 29:18 - The myth of multitasking and its negative effects 30:59 - The importance of monotasking for better focus 31:15 - Introduction to the "Faster" method for learning 32:06 - The role of forgetting in learning 32:50 - The misconception of multitasking and the benefits of focusing 33:35 - The significance of state and emotion in learning 35:22 - Tips for maintaining a positive learning state 36:11 - The power of teaching to reinforce learning 37:20 - Common misconceptions about learning 39:20 - The myth of using only 10% of our brain and neuroplasticity 41:08 - Importance of challenging limiting beliefs 43:08 - Influence of self-talk and belief systems on performance 45:04 - Scheduling time for learning and implementing new knowledge 47:04 - Making the most of conferences by setting aside time for implementation 48:48 - Application of AI to enhance human intelligence and learning 51:09 - Best practices for brain health and cognitive performance 57:25 - Importance of taking care of your brain as a wealth-building asset 59:04 - Steps to improve brain health, including diet, exercise, and positive peer groups 1:03:33 - Role of brain supplements and nootropics 1:06:00 - Influence of a positive peer group on behavior and performance 1:09:22 - Conclusion and final thoughts on brain health and continuous learning For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode519 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#518: If you want to learn about building wealth through entrepreneurship, you’ll enjoy this episode. When Rachel Rodgers graduated from law school, she didn’t take the conventional path to working at a big law firm. Instead, she opened her own practice, specializing in intellectual property law. Many of her clients were entrepreneurs and small business owners. Rachel quickly realized that many of her clients faced significant challenges in trying to grow their business. This ignited a new vision in her: to not just provide legal services but to help entrepreneurs achieve financial success. She pivoted, shutting down her law practice to open Hello Seven, a company that offers comprehensive business strategies to help entrepreneurs reach seven-figure incomes. She joins us today to share actionable insights that can help any entrepreneur, side hustler or small business owner reach seven figures in revenue. Timestamps: [Note: Time codes will vary on individual listening devices based on advertising run times.] 1:10 - Rachel introduces herself and her background in intellectual property law. 3:45 - Decision to start her own law practice. 5:27 - Challenges faced as a new lawyer and entrepreneur. 7:15 - Importance of financial independence and wealth-building for marginalized communities. 10:05 - Inspiration behind founding Hello Seven. 12:30 - Vision for Hello Seven and its mission to help entrepreneurs reach seven-figure incomes. 15:20 - The need for scaling businesses and making strategic decisions. 18:45 - Transition from a legal practice to a broader business coaching platform. 22:10 - Impact of Hello Seven's programs on entrepreneurs' lives. 24:55 - Concept of the "Million Dollar Badass." 28:30 - Success stories of clients. 31:15 - Challenges of balancing business growth with personal life. 34:05 - Importance of mindset in achieving business success. 37:20 - Introduction of the Hello Seven Foundation and its focus on supporting black mothers and babies. 40:00 - Plans for the future of Hello Seven and commitment to social impact. 42:30 - Advice for aspiring entrepreneurs looking to build successful businesses. 45:10 - Importance of mentorship and community support in entrepreneurship. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode518 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#517: Kimiko is dismayed that the asset allocation books she’s read led her down a path to an underperforming portfolio heavy in ex-US stock investments. Where should she go from here? Julie and her husband dream of owning a vacation rental in the Denver area even though the math doesn’t add up. It seems like everyone around can make it work though. What’s missing?  Casey is excited to build his real estate portfolio and purchase his third rental property. He’s also worried that his plan to fund the purchase with his 457 Plan is flawed. What should he do? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! P.S. Got a question? Leave it at https://affordanything.com/voicemail For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode517 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

#516: Have you ever wondered how small, seemingly insignificant actions can have massive impacts on your financial life?  In today's episode, we talk to Dr. Brian Klaas, a Professor at University College London and an affiliate researcher at the University of Oxford.  He explains how our decisions can lead to unintended and unanticipated consequences.  He describes why resilience is more important than efficiency when it comes to protecting your investments and career from unexpected shocks. You'll learn how to tell the difference between predictable problems and those that are full of uncertainty, giving you a new way to think about your decision-making process. Key Takeaways: Embrace the unpredictability of life and recognize the interconnectedness of your actions. Prioritize resilience over efficiency to mitigate catastrophic risks. Understand the difference between predictable and uncertain challenges to make smarter decisions. For more information, visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode516 Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices

Jessica and her husband are juggling two home sales and one home purchase within the next two to four years. How do they execute wisely while navigating a tight real estate market? Zerai works two jobs that both offer a pension and retirement plan. Can he take advantage of everything at his disposal or must he make some tough choices? Emily and her husband bought their home a year ago. But a national builder tempts them to sell and upgrade using a 3-2-1 buydown mortgage. Should they do it? Former financial planner Joe Saul-Sehy and I tackle these three questions in today’s episode. Enjoy! TIMESTAMPS: Please visit the show notes at https://affordanything.com/episode515 Resources Mentioned: https://www.irs.gov/retirement-plans/how-much-salary-can-you-defer-if-youre-eligible-for-more-than-one-retirement-plan https://www.irs.gov/retirement-plans/irc-457b-deferred-compensation-plans https://www.stackingbenjamins.com/start-2024-right-with-goals-jon-acuff-1459/ Learn more about your ad choices. Visit podcastchoices.com/adchoices